TOWN & COUNTRY
2009 OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler LLC
81-026-0917
Third Edition Printed in U.S.A.
2009 TOWN & COUNTRY
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution there-
fore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 97
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................239
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................331
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 415
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................437
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................491
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 509
10
INDEX
...................................................................519
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. Please take
the time to read these publications carefully. Following
the instructions and recommendations in this manual
will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain description and
illustrations may differ from your vehicles equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ................ 12
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) ........... 12
䡵 Sentry Key威 ......................... 14
▫ Replacement Keys ................... 16
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ....... 17
▫ Rearming Of The System .............. 17
䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped ..... 19
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . 19
▫ Using The RKE Transmitter ............. 20
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped ...... 27
▫ How To Use Remote Start .............. 27
䡵 Door Locks .......................... 30
▫ Manual Door Locks .................. 30
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ........ 32
䡵 Windows ........................... 36
▫ Power Vent Windows — If Equipped ...... 36
▫ Power Windows ..................... 36
䡵 Sliding Side Door ..................... 41
2
▫ Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped .... 42
▫ Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock .... 46
䡵 Liftgate ............................ 48
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped ........... 49
䡵 Storage Bin Safety Warning .............. 52
▫ Safety Warning ...................... 52
䡵 Occupant Restraints .................... 53
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .................. 55
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped ....................... 61
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ................ 61
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 62
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ......... 63
▫ Seat Belt Extender ................... 63
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -
Airbags ............................ 64
▫ Airbag System Components ............ 65
▫ Front Airbag Features ................. 65
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . 69
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ............. 74
▫ Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped 76
▫ Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped ...... 78
▫ Child Restraints ..................... 79
䡵 Rear Seat Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles
Only) — If Equipped..................... 90
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Restraining Infants And Small Children With
Seat Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles
Only) .............................. 91
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations ......... 93
䡵 Safety Tips .......................... 94
▫ Transporting Passengers ............... 94
▫ Exhaust Gas ........................ 94
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 95
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 96
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
with integrated ignition key and a Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert
the double-sided key into the ignition switch with either
side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent
positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the ON position.
1 — LOCK
2 — ACCESSORY
3—ON
4 — START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Integrated Ignition Key
The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of
the RKE transmitter.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the lower
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key from the RKE transmitter,
slide the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmit-
ter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out
with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition key to the
LOCK position and then remove the key.
Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: Power window switches will also remain active
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
WARNING!
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the integrated ignition
key in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCK
or ACC position.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni-
tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera-
tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the
engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter
to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and
loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil/Esso Speedpass™, additional RKE
transmitters, or any other transponder-equipped com-
ponents on the same key chain will not cause a fault
unless the additional part is physically held against
the RKE transmitter being used to start the vehicle.
Cell phones, pagers, or other Radio Frequency (RF)
electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-
mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of
programming a blank RKE transmitter to the vehicle
electronics. A blank RKE transmitter is one that has never
been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with
you to the authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming of RKE transmitters may be performed at
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible
signals. For the first three minutes, the headlights, park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound. For
an additional 15 minutes, only the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
The engine will run only if a valid key is used to start the
vehicle.
Rearming Of The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security
Light flashing, if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that
condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
Arming The System
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger
door is open, or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. The Vehicle Security
Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for
about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set.
After the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash
at a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu-
ously during vehicle operation, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Disarm The System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
•
The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the
alarm will sound.
•
When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash
for 30 seconds. Check the vehicle for tampering.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open the
doors. This feature is only available if you have RKE.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned ON.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and liftgate lights
do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior
lights ON position (extreme top position).
•
The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the extreme downward position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, and activate the Panic Alarm, optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m)
using a hand-held radio RKE transmitter. The RKE
transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the RKE transmitter with Integrated
Key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that
transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining trans-
mitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph
(8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons
for all RKE transmitters.
Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
equipped from the factory with three-button RKE trans-
mitters, and those built with power options will be
equipped with up to seven-button RKE transmitters.
Using the RKE Transmitter
Three-button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN-
LOCK, LOCK and PANIC functions.
Seven-button RKE transmitters will provide functions
that allow the same basic operation as the three-button,
but may also be used to operate the power liftgate
(optional), power sliding doors, Remote Start feature
(optional). Some features can be programmed to the
customers preferences. For example, flash headlights or
sound horn on LOCK.
Three-Button RKE Transmitter
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Unlock Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s side or twice to
unlock all doors and liftgate. The Illuminated Entry
system also turns on.
Remote Key Unlock on First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s side, or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
•
For vehicles equipped with an “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC),” refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in Section 4.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote
Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform-
ing the following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
Seven-Button RKE Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Remote Lock Doors and Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once
to acknowledge the signal.
Express Down Window Feature
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and
then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button
until the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
Sound Horn with Remote Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Sound
Horn with Lock,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features),” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key re-
moved.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time, or you turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency (RF)
noises of the system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Power Open/Close Power Liftgate — If Equipped
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter
within five seconds to Open/Close the Power Liftgate.
The liftgate will beep for three seconds and then open/
close. If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being
power closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
powered liftgate, pressing the LIFTGATE button twice
will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 sec-
onds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead
console.
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
pillar, pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only.
The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
Power Open/Close Left Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Left Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
Power Open/Close Right Power Sliding Door — If
Equipped
Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open/
Close the Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being
power-closed, the door will reverse to the full open
position.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Off Flash Lights with RKE Lock — If
Equipped
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Flash
Light With Lock,” under Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
vehicle.
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
The following table explains the Lamp Flash options.
Function
Which Turn
Signal Lamps
Number of
Flashes
Lock All 1
Unlock 1st Press Left Side 2
Unlock All Doors All 2
Left Side Left Side 2
Right Side Right Side 2
Liftgate All 2
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the battery door and transmitter housing
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the battery
door and transmitter housing together.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is approximately three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
Liftgate closed
•
Hazard switch off
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
•
The park lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The engine can be started two consecutive 15-minute
cycles with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition
switch must be turned to the ON position before you
can repeat the start sequence.
To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is
unlocked, you can enter the vehicle, insert the key into
the ignition switch and move it to the ON position,
otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15- minute
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn to ON” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
key. Once inserted, the message “Turn to ON” will
flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to ON.
Cancel Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
•
The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
•
Any engine warning lights come on
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
•
The hood is opened
•
The hazard switch is pressed
•
The shift lever is moved out of PARK
•
The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15-minute
cycle
To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the
Remote Start Mode, the system will not allow the Remote
Start button to shutdown the engine for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
When to Reset Remote Start
The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-
ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle
Security Alarm system is alarming, or if the PANIC
button was pressed, the vehicle must be reset by inserting
a valid key into the ignition switch and rotating the key
to the ON position, and then rotating the key back to the
LOCK/OFF position.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on
each door trim panel.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
Manual Door Lock Sliding Door Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING! (Continued)
•
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition switch, and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
Lock Doors Automatically — If Equipped
If the Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled, the
door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
The Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled when
your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can
be disabled by using the following procedure:
•
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to ⬙Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)⬙ in the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in
Section 4 of this manual.
•
On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC
perform the following steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
Front Passenger Power Door Switches
1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock
2 - Doors Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.)
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition key from the
LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of
five times, ending in the ON position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be disabled. If neces-
sary, repeat the previous procedure.
The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men-
tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the
EVIC (if equipped), Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features) section.
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit — If
Equipped
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This
will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into
the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the
shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door locks (lock or unlock).
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to ⬙Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)⬙ in the
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in
Section 4 of this manual.
•
On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC
perform the following steps:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this
programming procedure.)
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch.
4. Within 15-seconds, cycle the ignition key from the
LOCK position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of
five times ending in the ON position (do not start the
engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, the program mode was
canceled before the feature could be changed. If neces-
sary, repeat the previous procedure.
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be
reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure
or by performing the procedure in the EVIC, Customer-
Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped.
NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
(24 km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit
features in accordance with local laws.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WINDOWS
Power Vent Windows — If Equipped
Switches on the driver’s door trim panel let the driver
operate the two vent windows from the driver’s seat.
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows using
switches located on the driver’s door trim panel. The
switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position and during power accessory
delay.
Power Vent Window Switches
1–Open 2–Close
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to LOCK, depending upon the accessory delay
setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature.
Power Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped
The driver may lock out all power windows by depress-
ing the bar switch just below the power window
switches.
Driver’s Power Window Switches
1 – Left Rear 3 – Left Front
2 – Right Rear 4 – Right Front
Power Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passenger’s door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and locks and unlocks all doors. The switch will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position and during power accessory delay.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch — If
Equipped
Second row passengers may power the sliding door
window by a single switch on the door handle assembly.
Front Passenger Power Window Switches
1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock
2 - Doors Lock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON or ACC position and during power acces-
sory delay.
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The front window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
detent, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to
10 minutes (depending on the accessory delay setting)
after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Auto Up Feature With Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
The front Driver switch may be equipped with an Auto
Up feature. Lift the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE:
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from
the window path before closing.
Auto Up Reset — If Equipped
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following
steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the
outside. Pull outward on exterior handle to open the
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door.
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
lowing guidelines:
•
Always open the door smoothly.
•
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open-
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in
the downhill direction.
•
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding
door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
outside handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped
The power sliding door may be opened or closed manu-
ally or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter,
overhead console switch, or rear door switch. Pulling the
inside or outside power sliding door handle will also
power open or close the power sliding door.
NOTE: Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a
second time while the sliding door is power opening or
power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or
closed manually.
Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five
seconds to open a power sliding door. When the door is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
a second time will close the door.
There are power sliding side door switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the
rear seat passengers and in the overhead console for the
driver and passengers. Pressing the switch once will
open the power sliding door. When the door is fully open
pressing the switch a second time will close the door.
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding
door feature will be canceled.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to
disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen-
gers.
NOTE:
•
The power sliding side door switches will not open if
the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h). To close the power sliding door with
the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph
(0 km/h), the brake must be pressed
•
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will automati-
cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided
it meets sufficient resistance.
Power Sliding Door
1 — Heated Seat 4 — Door Handle
2 — Power Window 5 — Power Sliding Door
3 — Manual Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
•
If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
is fully open and then press the switch again.
•
If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
cally stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
before closing the door.
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for
12 seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be
entering or exiting the vehicle.
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or
disabled by performing the following procedure:
1. Place the key in the ignition switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/LOCK five times ending
in the ON position (do not start the engine).
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the HAZ-
ARD switch.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the
previous procedure.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the second row sliding door switches
and handles may be overridden by pressing the ON side
of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front
overhead console.
When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the
ON position, the power sliding side door may not be
opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the
trim panel just in front of the sliding door or activating
the inside power sliding door handle.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch
1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
Child Protection Door Lock system.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward
(toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door
Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door.
NOTE:
•
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, al-
ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
Child Protection Door Lock
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-
gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches
on the overhead console or the switches located on the
trim panel just in front of the power sliding door.
•
The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection
Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional
operation of the power sliding door from the rear
seats, press the ”ON” Master Lock Out Switch lo-
cated in the front overhead console, next to the
driver.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened
from the outside door handle or the switches located
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward
(away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
equipped).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE:
•
After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
•
The power sliding side door switches will not open the
power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the
vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
•
The power sliding door will operate from the outside
door handle, the RKE transmitter, the switches on the
overhead console, or the switches located on the trim
panel just in front of the power sliding door when the
shift lever is in PARK, regardless of the child lock lever
position.
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release handle
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull
the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the
power liftgate feature, pressing the button on the RKE
Liftgate Handle Location
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked
for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the
liftgate area.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
pressing the button located on the overhead console.
The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,
located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate.
Overhead Console Master Power Switch
1 — Left Door 3 — Right Door
2 — Liftgate 4 — Master Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
NOTE:
•
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
meets sufficient resistance.
•
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open
position.
Rear Power Liftgate Switch
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The power liftgate must be in the full open or close
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
be opened or closed manually.
•
If the liftgate release button is activated while the
power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
•
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift
lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
•
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below ⫺12°F (⫺24°C) or temperatures above 143°F
(62°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate buttons.
•
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
•
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
•
Do not allow children to have access to the second
row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin,
young children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die from
suffocation or heat stroke.
•
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts
•
Advanced multistage driver and front passenger air-
bags
•
Supplemental side airbags that span the front, second,
and third row seating for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
•
Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder
belts.
The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Removing Slack from Belt
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of
the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a “click”.
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a “click.” The retractor should
withdraw any slack in the belt.
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the
large latch plate against the red button on the small latch
plate and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into the
headliner.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or
downward to help position the belt away from your
neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an-
chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem-
bly.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer-
gency) Locking mode.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
ers are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the occupied driver’s seat belt has not been buckled
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will
alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should
also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 sec-
onds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 Programming
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder
Light to turn off.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
driver’s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds,
ending with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat
belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled or
retracted.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are no longer functional. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to
open only when the airbags are inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios
etc.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Warning Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Seat Belt Reminder Light
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
(if equipped)
Front Airbag Features
The front airbag system has dual-stage driver and front
passenger airbags. This system provides output appro-
priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the impact
sensors at the front of the car.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the second stage is expended later in the crash
event.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
In addition to the small size, the inflating gases exit
through strategically placed vents, which direct the gas
away from the occupant.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC Airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
•
Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle are
deployed.
•
Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy during
an impact severe enough to require airbag occupant
protection.
WARNING!
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the
location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from any
obstructions.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the
driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work with
seat belts to improve occupant protection.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate-to-
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate-to-severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. However, even in collisions where the airbags
work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat. Infants in rear-facing child
restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a
vehicle with a passenger front airbag. An airbag deploy-
ment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that
position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraints.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts
properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to
inflate.
If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against the
door. Airbags will inflate forcefully into the space be-
tween you and the door.
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if a frontal or side collision is severe
enough to require the airbags to inflate. Based on the
impact sensors signals, a central electronic ORC deploys
the front airbags, side airbag inflatable curtains, and front
seat belt pretensioners as required for each type of
impact.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not
on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to six seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Impact Sensors trigger airbag deployment in front and
side impacts, and aid the ORC in determining appropri-
ate response to impact events. Additional sensors in the
ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and
provide verification.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
The ORC deploys the SABIC during a collision with
other vehicles and during collisions where the impact is
confined to a particular area of the vehicle. In these
events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the
impact side of the vehicle.
NOTE: The ORC will also detect and protect for rollover
events. In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
airbags will deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, the
vehicle communication network intact, and the power
intact, the ORC will determine if the event is severe
enough for the Enhanced Accident Response System to
perform the following functions:
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine.
•
Flashes hazard lights as long as the battery has power
or until the ignition key is turned off.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlocks the doors automatically.
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a moderate-
to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver, front
passenger and rear passengers, and then immediately
deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modi-
fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabili-
ties, contact your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately four to six seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
•
The light remains on after the approximate four to
six-second interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-
tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify par-
ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-
ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-
tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-
dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact velocity and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat (if equipped) is located
in each second-row passenger seat. The booster seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
The booster seat is designed to raise the child high
enough to use the vehicle lap and shoulder belt. The
booster seat latch release handle is located at the front of
the seat cushion.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Pull the release handle forward to release the latch and
seat cushion. Then, lift seat cushion up and push back to
lock it in the booster seat position.
Booster Seat Release Handle
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury of death:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The swivel seat should be locked in the forward-
facing position when using the booster seat with
the vehicle in motion.
•
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat cushion could cause serious injury.
2. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
3. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
4. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
Booster Seat Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
5. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
6. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
Integrated Child Seat — If Equipped
Operating instructions for the second row bench seat
with Integrated Child Seat are included with the seat. If
the instructions are not with the seat or in the Owner’s
Manual Package, replacement instruction can be ob-
tained.
Integrated Child Booster Seat
Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instruc-
tions: Refer to the Publication order forms at the back of
this manual and specify publication number
81–026–0917.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH)” later in this section.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
Rearward-facing child seats and infant carriers must
NEVER be used while the second row Swivel ’n Go
seats are in the rearward-facing position.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never place any child seat, booster seat, or infant
carrier in the Swivel ’n Go seat while it is in the
rearward-facing position. The swivel seat should be
locked in the forward position when using any child
seat, booster seat, or infant carriers, with the vehicle
in motion. Failure to do so could result in serious
injury or even death.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren (LATCH)” later in this section.
An aftermarket belt-positioning booster seat is for chil-
dren weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belts. If the
child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback,
they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesn’t
help, move the child to the center rear seating position
and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the
shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/childsafety/menu.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
•
Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go seating must be
wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked
in either the forward or rearward position. Failure
to do so could result in serious injury or even
death.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap
portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten
the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the belt
tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen with
time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if
necessary.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System:
Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is
equipped with the child restraint anchorage system
called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchor-
age systems are installed on all second-row seats and in
the center position on all third row fold-in-floor seats.
Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages,
located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all
third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child
restraint tether anchor at the center seating position.
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Many, but
not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate
straps on each side, with each having a hook or connec-
tor, and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap.
Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward
facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap, a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here. Again, carefully follow the installation
instructions that are provided with the child restraint
system.
NOTE:
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
•
If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing a infant or child restraint.
Installing the Lower Tethers:
1. The lower anchors are round bars located at the rear of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower tether strap (refer-
ence the child restraint seat instructions) to ease the
installation.
NOTE: It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap
and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so
the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle
seat and child restraint.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
3. Attach the lower tethers to the lower anchor bars.
Ensure the lower tether is firmly engaged and hook is
secure.
4. Tighten the lower tether strap while firmly pushing
the child restrain rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat. Remove all slack in the lower tethers.
Reference the child restraint instructions for information
on properly removing slack.
Installing the Top Tether Strap (with either Lower
Anchors or Vehicle Seat Belt):
1. Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head
restraint between the steel posts.
LATCH Anchorages
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Provide enough slack (reference car restraint instruc-
tions) for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor
located near the bottom of the seat back.
3. Clip tether hook to tether anchor. Ensure hook is
firmly engaged and secure.
4. Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: The top tether strap is always to be secured,
regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the
lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Installing the Child Restraint Using the Vehicle
Seat Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode” in this section.
To install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seat
belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the
belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate
into the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing out
of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the
retractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
ally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (COMMERCIAL
VEHICLES ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight.
WARNING!
NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in
a vehicle without rear seats. In an accident, serious
injury or death may occur from the deploying pas-
senger airbag.
This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward-
facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se-
cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a
passenger airbag. In an accident, a passenger airbag
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints.
Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat
Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only)
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
•
The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weigh-
ing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one year
old. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE-
LETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).
•
The forward-facing child seat is for children from
about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
old.
•
A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearward-
facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE
INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE
EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEA-
TURE (Commercial Vehicles Only). When a convert-
ible seat is properly installed facing forward, the
vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most
position.
•
Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in
the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-
positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat
with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position. Never
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them
or under their arm.
Tether Installation for Commercial Vehicles with
Rear Seat Delete
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower
rear of the front passenger seat.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
head rest.
4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
5. Following the child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tighten the child restraint tether strap.
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
condition that might affect the performance of the strap is
observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized deal-
ership for a replacement part.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose
threads. If these or any other condition that might
affect the performance of the strap is observed, DO
NOT USE that strap. Personal injury may result.
Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement
part.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures”
in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR
STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make
sure that all windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the
recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors ............................. 102
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 102
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 102
▫ Outside Mirrors ..................... 103
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
— If Equipped ...................... 103
▫ Outside Mirror Folding Feature .......... 104
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 104
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 105
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped ........ 105
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors —
If Equipped ........................ 106
䡵 Blind Spot Monitoring — If Equipped ....... 106
▫ Rear Cross Path ..................... 113
▫ Modes Of Operation .................. 114
䡵 uconnect威 phone — If Equipped ........... 115
▫ Operation ......................... 117
▫ Phone Call Features .................. 125
3
▫ uconnect威 phone Features .............. 128
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 133
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect威 phone ..................... 135
▫ General Information .................. 144
䡵 Voice Recognition (VR) System
— If Equipped ........................ 144
▫ Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation . . . 144
▫ Commands ........................ 146
▫ Voice Training ...................... 149
䡵 Seats .............................. 149
▫ Manual Front And Second Row Seat
Adjuster ........................... 150
▫ Eight–Way Driver And Passenger Power Seat
— If Equipped ...................... 151
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints ............. 152
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 152
▫ Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped ..... 154
▫ Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever
— If Equipped ...................... 155
▫ Stow ’n Go威 Seating — If Equipped ....... 155
▫ Easy Access Seating .................. 159
▫ Swivel ’n Go威 Premium Seating — If
Equipped .......................... 160
▫ Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped .... 167
▫ Third Row Power Seat — If Equipped ..... 168
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ....... 172
▫ Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory ................ 173
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only) ................... 176
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood ........... 177
䡵 Lights ............................ 179
▫ Interior Lighting .................... 179
▫ Parking Lights ..................... 181
▫ Headlights ........................ 181
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..... 181
▫ Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped 182
▫ Headlight Delay — If Equipped ......... 182
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada/Fleet
Vehicles Only) ...................... 183
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ........ 183
▫ Battery Protection ................... 184
▫ Multifunction Lever ................. 184
▫ Turn Signals ....................... 184
▫ High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..... 185
▫ Flash-To-Pass ...................... 186
▫ SmartBeams — If Equipped ............ 186
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers ......... 187
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...... 189
䡵 Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped ....... 191
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ......... 192
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 193
▫ To Activate ......................... 194
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed .............. 194
▫ Deactivating Electronic Speed Control ...... 194
▫ Resuming Speed ..................... 195
▫ Varying The Speed Setting .............. 195
▫ Accelerating To Pass .................. 195
䡵 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped ........... 196
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ............... 197
䡵 Rear Backup Camera System —
If Equipped .......................... 201
▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off — With
Navigation Radio .................... 202
▫ Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off —
Without Navigation Radio .............. 203
䡵 Overhead Consoles .................... 204
▫ Front Overhead Console ............... 204
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 207
▫ Programming HomeLink威 .............. 209
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .... 212
▫ Security ........................... 212
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .................. 213
▫ General Information .................. 213
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 213
▫ Power Sunroof Operation .............. 214
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets — If Equipped ...... 216
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped ............ 219
䡵 Cupholders .......................... 220
▫ Instrument Panel Cupholders ............ 220
▫ Interior Bottle Holders ................ 221
▫ Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped ...... 222
䡵 Storage ............................. 223
▫ Glove Compartments ................. 223
▫ Door Trim Panel Storage ............... 224
▫ Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped .... 224
▫ Umbrella Holder ..................... 225
▫ Second Row Floor Storage Bins .......... 225
▫ Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage
— If Equipped ...................... 226
▫ Coat Hooks ........................ 227
▫ Cargo Area Storage ................... 227
䡵 Console Features ...................... 228
▫ Basic Console ....................... 228
▫ Premium Console — If Equipped ......... 229
䡵 Rear Window Features .................. 233
▫ Rear Window Defroster ................ 233
䡵 Load-Leveling System .................. 234
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped ......... 235
䡵 Sun Screens — If Equipped .............. 236
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
When using this feature the mirror will automatically
adjust for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You
can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the
base of the mirror. A light next to the button will
illuminate when the dimming feature is activated.
Manual Rearview Mirror
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
The outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by
the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside
mirror. The outside mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirror Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions: full forward, full rearward and
normal.
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
Use the mirror select switch located on the driver’s door
trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside
mirrors. Press the switch to the L (left) or R (right) for
mirror selection. Press the mirror select switch again to
guard against accidentally moving a mirror position. The
mirror selection will also automatically turn off after
30 seconds.
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Power Side Mirror Adjust
1 — Left Mirror 3 — Adjusting Switch
2 — Right Mirror
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s power mirror preselected positions can be con-
trolled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in Section 3.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
this section, for further information.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse (Available with Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
rearward of the front doors. The drivers outside mirror
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The drivers
outside mirror will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en-
abled when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Tilt
Mirrors in Reverse” under “Customer-Programmable
Features” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in Section 4.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Mirror
Rear Detection Zones
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is opera-
tional. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap-
proximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi-
mately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•
The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
•
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors.
The BSM system can also be configured to sound an
audible (chime) alert and mute the radio to notify the
Sensor Locations
BSM Warning Light
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
driver of objects that have entered the detection zones.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in this section.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Overtaking/Approaching Overtaking/Passing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maxi-
mum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP Detection Zones
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including radio muting.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
under ⬙Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
Blind Spot Alert
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
•
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
•
If the Hazard Flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is re-
quested, the radio is also muted. Turn/hazard signal
status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
uconnect姞 phone — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated uconnect威 phone. Refer to your “Navigation
User’s Manual” for uconnect威 phone operating instruc-
tions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located
on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate.
uconnect威 phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. uconnect威 allows you to
dial a phone number with your cellular phone using
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or
⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the
system will automatically mute your radio when using
the uconnect威 phone.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ve r-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect威 website for sup-
ported phones.
For uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
uconnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the sys-
tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The uconnect威 phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect威 phone
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect威 phone. The uconnect威 phone allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The uconnect威 phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
uconnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular
phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile)
you may not be able to use any uconnect威 phone
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The uconnect威 phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect威 phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the uconnect威 phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect威
phone and to navigate through the uconnect威 phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
uconnect威 phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
uconnect威 phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The uconnect威 phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the uconnect威 phone from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All uconnect威 phone sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect威 phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect威 phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions
for pairing.
The following are general phone to uconnect威 phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the uconnect威 phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your uconnect威 phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your uconnect威 phone. The priority
allows the uconnect威 phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
uconnect威 phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
•
The uconnect威 phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the uconnect威 phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
uconnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
•
The uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your uconnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The uconnect威 phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, uconnect威 phone automati-
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
uconnect威 phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect威
website for supported phones.
•
To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect威)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the uconnect威 phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the uconnect威 phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
lar phone is accessible.
•
Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the uconnect威 phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to uconnect威 phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect威
phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the uconnect威 phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the uconnect威 phone is playing the desired entry
and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the uconnect威 phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the uconnect威 Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The uconnect威 phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
uconnect威 phone if the feature(s) are available on your
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect威 phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
uconnect威 phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙
or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this
section.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG-
NITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
uconnect威 phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
uconnect威 phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the uconnect威 phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the uconnect威 phone to the cellular phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
uconnect姞 phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the uconnect威 phone is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every uconnect威 phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect威 phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect威 phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
•
The uconnect威 phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
cellular phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect威 phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect威
phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the uconnect威 phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your uconnect威 phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect威 phone.
When calling a number with your uconnect威 phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish
to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4
6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored uconnect威 phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The uconnect威 phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect威 phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect威 phone will play
the current confirmation prompt status and you will
be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the uconnect威 phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using uconnect威 phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the uconnect威 phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The uconnect威 phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the uconnect威 phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the uconnect威 phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the uconnect威 phone:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the uconnect威 phone:
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The uconnect威 phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect威 phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your uconnect威 phone paired cellular phone to the
uconnect威 phone or vice versa, press the VOICE REC-
OGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
uconnect威 phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a uconnect威 phone paired cellular
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
phone and the uconnect威 phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The uconnect威 phone will play the phone names of all
paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the uconnect威 phone.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
uconnect威 phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete uconnect威 phone Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect姞
phone
uconnect威 phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “uconnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the uconnect威 phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect威 phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect威 phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect威 phone.
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the uconnect威 phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When you press the VR button, you will hear a beep. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR button, listen for the beep, and say
your command.
Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted,
and after the beep, you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR button and
say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Commands
The Voice Recognition (VR) system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-
tion (VR) system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for VR is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button. You may say
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the VR button to stop
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Language German”
•
“Language Dutch”
•
“Language Italian”
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR button, say “System Setup” and once you
are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train
your own voice to the system and will improve recogni-
tion.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Manual Front And Second Row Seat Adjuster
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat.
Pull the bar upward and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjuster
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Eight–Way Driver And Passenger Power Seat — If
Equipped
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the seat. The front switch controls the up/down,
forward/rearward and tilt adjustment. The rear switch
controls the recline adjustment of the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switch
1 — Front Switch 2 — Rear Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of a rear impact. Pull upward or push down-
ward on the head restraint cushion so that the upper
edge is as high as practical. To raise the head restraint,
pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head
restraint, press the release tab located at the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The controls for front heated seats are located on the
center instrument panel area.
Adjusting The Head Restraint Cushion
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
ing. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
Second row heated seat switches are located in the
sliding side door handle trim panels and function the
same as front switches.
Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. DO NOT place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner control lever is on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, then
push back to the desired position and release the lever.
Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward
and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
Manual Reclining Seat Control
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
DO NOT ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. To increase the support, rotate the lever
downward. To decrease the support, rotate the handle
upward.
Stow ’n Go姞 Seating — If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Stow ’n Go威 seating, the
second and third row seats may be folded into the floor
for convenient storage.
Manual Lumbar Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
To Fold Second Row Seats
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the
second row seat.
3. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the
⬙LOCK⬙ position and then pull up on the storage bin latch
to open the cover.
4. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down. To
assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of
the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin.
6. Close the storage bin cover.
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
Second Row Seat Release Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
To Unfold Second Row Seats
1. Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover.
2. Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
3. Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever, located on
the outboard side of the seat, to return the seatback to its
full upright position.
Second Row Seat Release Handle
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position, close
the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking
mechanism to the ⬙Unlocked⬙ position.
Easy Access Seating
The second row Stow ’n Go威 seats can be tilted forward
for easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area.
To tilt the seat, pull forward on the release strap located
on the front of the seat between the seatback and seat
cushion and tilt the seat fully forward.
To return the seat to its upright position, push rearward
on the seatback until it latches. Always ensure that it is
fully latched.
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
Tilting Second Row Stow ’n Go威 Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Swivel ’n Go姞 Premium Seating — If Equipped
Premium second row Swivel ’n Go威 Seating features
include:
•
A table that installs between the second and third row
seats. The table disassembles and stows in the hidden
second row floor storage bin
•
Seats rotate to face forward or rearward
•
Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats
•
Dual folding armrests
•
A side storage pocket that will accommodate a phone
or handheld game
•
Seats are removable
Swivel ’n Go威 Seating Features
1 — Moveable Armrest 4 — Fore-Aft Adjustment
2 — Seatback Release 5 — Seat Release
3 — Swivel Release
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the seatback release handle is lifted, the seat-
back will rotate forward. To avoid injury, if you are
not seated in the seat, stay clear from the area in the
path of the rotating seatback.
To swivel the seat: Pull the lower handle on the outboard
side of the seat and push the side of the seatback to begin
rotation. Once the seat begins to rotate, the handle may
be released. The seat locks in position once reaching the
forward or rearward positions only.
Seatbacks fold forward on an angle, not flat. This allows
the seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded.
Swivel Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
WARNING!
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury or even death:
•
NEVER place any child seat or infant carrier in the
Swivel ’n Go威 seat while it is in the rearward
facing position.
•
The swivel seat should be locked in the forward
position when using any child seat or infant
carriers, with the vehicle in motion.
•
Occupants riding in Swivel ’n Go威 seating must
be wearing their seat belt and the seat must be
locked in either the forward-facing or rearward-
facing position.
•
Make sure the Swivel ’n Go威 seat is in a locked
position with the release handle fully engaged.
Test the seat after it is locked to see that it doesn’t
swivel.
Removing Swivel ’n Go威 Premium Seating — If
Equipped
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the
seat, and stow the third row seat.
2. Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front
edge of the swivel seat.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. From behind the seat, lift up on the rear of the seat
cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction.
4. Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate.
Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease the
removal process.
5. Lower the release handle located at the bottom front
edge of the seat.
Each seat weighs about 90 lbs (81 kg).
NOTE: Electrical contacts for the available heated seats
automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed
or installed. The contacts slide past each other as the seat
is rolled to and from the strikers.
When reinstalling the seat, make certain to lower the
release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Release Bar
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Swivel ’n Go威 Premium Seating Table — If
Equipped
The Swivel ’n Go威 Seating Table consists of an easily
assembled post and top.
The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in
use. To install the table follow these steps:
1. Open the floor storage cover in front of the second row
seats.
2. Remove the pole and table top by loosening the hook
and loop straps.
3. Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear.
Second Row Seating and Table
Table and Leg Storage
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into
notch of the base.
5. Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops.
NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the lock
button engages the base.
6. Place the table top over the installed pole aligning
with the mating feature of the underside of the table top.
Apply pressure on the table top and press downward.
NOTE: You will hear an audible “click” when the table
latch engages the pole.
WARNING!
Failure to comply with the following conditions
could result in serious injury or even death:
•
DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in
motion.
•
NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in-
stalled.
•
DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table.
(Continued)
Installing Table Leg Into Base
1 — Table Base 2 — Lock/Release Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WARNING! (Continued)
•
DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table, use
available cupholders.
•
Second row seats must be locked in the rearward
facing position before installing the table.
To separate the table top from the pole, follow these
steps:
1. Locate the release latch on the underside of the table
top.
2. Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release
from the pole.
3. While pulling on the latch, pull upward to remove the
table top from the pole.
Table Top Release
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The table top should be removed from the leg
prior to removing the leg from its mounting base.
4. Locate the release button on the pole. Press the release
button firmly to activate the release from the base.
5. While pressing the release button, twist the pole in a
counterclockwise rotation until it stops. Pull upward to
remove the pole from the base.
6. Place the pole on the underside of the table top and
secure with the hook and loop straps.
7. Once the pole and table top are secured, you may
place them in the floor storage bin in front of the second
row seats.
NOTE: Always store the table and pole in the floor
storage bin when not in use.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
removable for added cargo space. Release levers are
located on the rear leg assemblies, near the floor. To
remove the seat, squeeze each release handle and rotate
downwards to deploy the wheels. A lock indicator button
pops up when the seat is unlocked. The seat assembly
can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its
Easy Out威 Rollers.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent posi-
tions on the floor. Squeeze the release handle and rotate
upward until the lock indicator button returns into the
handle.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the bench seats could become
loose. Personal injuries could result. After reinstall-
ing these seats, be sure the red indicator button on
the release handles return into the handles.
Third Row Power Seat — If Equipped
The third row power seat offers the following features:
•
The seatbacks can be folded forward for additional
cargo space if needed.
•
Head restraints can be stowed with the seat.
•
Tailgate mode flips the seat rearward to face out the
tailgate.
Release Handles
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward
for occupant comfort.
Third Row Power Seat Switch — If Equipped
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the
left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank.
The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open
and the vehicle is in PARK.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Third Row Power Seat Switch
One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually
or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to
the following positions using the switch bank located on
the left rear trim panel:
NOTE: The third row power seat system includes
obstacle detection for safe operation. When the system
detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
motion a short distance to move the seat away from the
obstacle. Should this occur, remove the obstacle and press
the button again, for the desired position.
To Fold Third Row Seats Manually — If Equipped
1. Lower the head restraint to its full down position.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” located on the rear of the
seat to lower the seatback.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” to release the anchors.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
1 — Open to Normal 4 — Fold Flat
2 — Stow 5 — Right/Left Seats
3 — Tailgate 5 — Both Seats
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull release strap marked “3” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to unlock the recliner.
3. Pulling strap “3” releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Folding Third Row Seat Strap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Tailgate Mode
1. Pull release strap “2”, then pull release strap “3” to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, NEVER operate the
vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel
can be programmed to recall the driver’s seat, driver’s
outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator pedals,
and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
pressed.
Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 and 3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE
transmitters. Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to
each of the memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE
Transmitter to Memory
NOTE: Each time the SET (S) button and a numbered
button (1 or 2) is pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
Step 3.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s side-
view mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
Driver Memory Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
7. Press and release the SET (S) button located on the
driver’s door.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
11. Select ⬙Remote Linked to Memory⬙ in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
to the “Customer-Programmable Features” in the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” section for
more information.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory
position using the other numbered Memory button or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the EVIC.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button 1 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position
1.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position
2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the driver’s door during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
2. Press and release MEMORY button 1. The system will
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before continu-
ing to Step 3.
3. Press and release the memory SET (S) button located
on the driver’s door. A chime will sound signaling that
you are in the memory set mode.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 on the driver’s door. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the driver memory has been set.
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. A chime will sound
signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been
successfully disabled.
To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either
Memory Position, repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE
transmitter.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Refer to the Remote Linked to Memory ⬙Customer-
Programmable Features⬙ in the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) for more information.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
ONLY)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
key from the ignition switch.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of
the LOCK position.
•
When you remove the key from the ignition switch the
driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is
between 0.9 – 2.7 in (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn it out of the LOCK position.
•
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit Position.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be en-
abled or disabled through the programmable features in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If your
vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC, your dealership
can activate/deactivate this feature for you. For details,
refer to “Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit,” section
of this manual.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
panel, below the steering column.
2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
center of the hood opening. Locate, then push the safety
catch lever to the right, while raising the hood at the same
time.
Hood Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 12 in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Safety Catch Location
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
All of the lights, except the Hazard Warning lights,
headlight high beams and flash-to-pass, are controlled by
switches to the left of the steering column on the instru-
ment panel.
Interior Lighting
Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is
opened, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
activated, or when the dimmer control is moved to the
extreme top.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi-
mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds
every activation thereafter until the engine is started, if
one of the following occur:
•
A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
•
Any overhead reading light is left on
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Headlight Switch With Halo Control Assembly
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Dome Light Positions
Rotate the dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent (extreme
top position) to turn on the interior
lights. The interior lights will remain
on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Lighting Defeat (Off)
Rotate the dimmer control to the off
position (extreme bottom). The inte-
rior lights will remain off when the
doors or liftgate are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control to the first
detent. This feature brightens the
odometer, radio and overhead dis-
plays when the parking lights or head-
lights are on.
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the instrument panel
upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Halo Lights — If Equipped
Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help
to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in
locating specific features while driving at night.
To activate the Halo lights, push in the Halo
switch control knob. Pressing the switch con-
trol knob in a second time will turn the Halo
lights off.
Parking Lights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent
to turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all
instrument panel lighting.
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch knob to the second
detent to turn the headlights and parking lights
on. This also turns on all instrument panel
lighting.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the dimmer control up or down.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the “A” on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the “O” off
position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped
When your headlights are in the Automatic mode and the
engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights
on when windshield wipers are on may be found on
vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system.
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
in Section 4 under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” for more information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned ON, the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not
remain on. To change the timer setting, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Automatic Headlights
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an EVIC. Refer to “Delay Turning Head-
lights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on, or if the
dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada/Fleet Vehicles
Only)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
headlight switch control knob. Pressing the head-
light switch control knob in a second time will turn the
front fog lights off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, parking lights, or
front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After
eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK
position and the headlight switch in any position other
than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically
until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight
switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the three minute delay.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
The multifunction lever controls the:
•
Turn Signals
•
Headlight Beams Low/High
•
Flash-To-Pass (Optical Horn)
•
Front and Rear Wipers — Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for approximately
1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will
sound to alert the driver.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the multi-
function lever toward the instrument panel will switch
from low beams to high beams. Pulling back to the
neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam
operation.
Turn Signals
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
SmartBeams — If Equipped
The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light-
ing at night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
and automatically switches from high beams to low
beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through the
EVIC. Refer to “Automatic High Beams,” “Personal
Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4.
2. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO (A) position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to “Mul-
tifunction Lever” in this section.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at, or above, 25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the
SmartBeam system.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights from the high beam to the low beam position.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
(A) to the on position.
NOTE: Broken, muddy or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield
or camera lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to select the desired wiper speed.
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage
to the wiper motor may occur.
1. Mist, Front Wiper and Washer
Press the end of the multifunction lever inward to the
first detent and release to clear the windshield. Pressing
the multifunction lever inward to the second detent will
Washer And Wiper Controls
1 — Front Mist/Washer 3 — Rear Wiper/Washer
2 — Wiper Speeds
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
cause the washers to spray for a maximum of 10 seconds,
or until the multifunction lever is released, and the
wipers will cycle three times.
NOTE:
•
If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the delay
range, the wipers will operate for several seconds after
the multifunction lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
•
If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the off
position, the wipers will operate for approximately
two wipe cycles and automatically turn off.
2. Intermittent, Low and High Speed Wipers
Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, then turn the end of
the multifunction lever to select the desired delay inter-
val. The delay can be regulated from approximately two
seconds, to a maximum of 20 seconds between cycles.
The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less
than 10 mph (16 km/h).
Low-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
lever past the intermittent settings, to the first detent.
High-speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
lever past the intermittent settings, to the second detent.
3. Rear Wiper and Washer
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-
tent interval.
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
wiper speed only.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. This
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five
intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been
calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If the opera-
tor desires more wiping sensitivity, they may select
sensitivity positions 4 or 5. If the operator desires less
wiping sensitivity, they may select sensitivity positions 2
or 1. Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
•
The rain sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•
The rain sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind-
shield.
•
Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
•
The rain sense feature can be turned on and off
through the EVIC (if equipped). Refer to “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
The rain sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The rain sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is first
switched ON, and the vehicle is stationary, and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, or
the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph
(0 km/h), or the outside temperature rises above
freezing.
•
Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The rain sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is ON, and the trans-
mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position, and
the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless
the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved
or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
•
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with remote starting system, rain sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on
the steering column, below the steering wheel.
To tilt the column, push the lever downward to the
unlocked position. Move the steering column up or
down, as desired. Pull the lever upward to the locked
position to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
1 — Locked Position
2 — Unlocked Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward, or away, from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel. The adjust-
able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of
driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat positions.
The switch is located on the left side of the steering
column.
Press the button forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
Adjustable Pedal Switch
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con-
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button (located in the end of the lever)
once, and the cruise indicator light (located in the mes-
sage window of the odometer) will illuminate, showing
that the Electronic Speed Control system is on. To turn
the Electronic Speed Control system off, push the ON/
OFF button a second time, and both the Electronic Speed
Control system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET lever downward and then release. Lift your foot
off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
Deactivating Electronic Speed Control
A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever (CANCEL) toward you will deacti-
vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed
memory.
Resuming Speed
To resume a previously set speed, raise the Electronic
Speed Control lever (RESUME/ACCEL) upward, and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Varying The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, speed can be
increased by raising and holding the RESUME/ACCEL
lever upwards. When released, a new set speed will be
established.
Raising the RESUME/ACCEL lever upward, once, will
result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time
the lever is tapped upward speed increases, so tapping
the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will in-
crease speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, press the
SET/DECEL lever downward, and hold. Release the
Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is
reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the SET/DECEL lever downward, once, will
result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time
the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped downward,
speed decreases.
Accelerating To Pass
Press the accelerator as you normally would. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Your vehicle may experience a downshift (automatic
transmissions only) while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle
set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist provides visible and audible indi-
cations of the distance between the rear fascia and the
detected obstacle, when backing up. When backing up,
you should also use the inside rearview and outside
mirrors.
The Rear Park Assist will remember the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle, when
the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON position.
The Rear Park Assist can be active only when the shift
lever is in REVERSE. When in REVERSE, the system
scans for objects behind the vehicle, using four sensors
located in the rear bumper.
NOTE: The system will be active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view. The monitored area seems oval
in shape. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 11.8 in (30 cm) up to 78.7 in (200 cm) from the rear
fascia in the horizontal direction, depending on the
location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of
obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the
headliner near the liftgate glass, provides both visible
and audible warnings to indicate the distance between
the rear fascia and the detected obstacle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN/ON
position, the warning display will turn on all of its LEDs
for about one second. Each side of the warning display
has six yellow and two red LED lights, one set to warn of
obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other
set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the
vehicle. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red
LED is illuminated.
Rear Park Assist LED Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear-
view mirror or by looking directly at the display above
the rear window.
The system dimly illuminates the two innermost yellow
LEDs when it is on and detects no obstacles. The follow-
ing chart shows the warning display operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle.
WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES
DISPLAY INDICA-
TOR
OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: INDICATOR
COLOR
AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
Inner LED 59 in (150 cm) Yellow Yes, Half Second
1st LED 51.2 in (130 cm) Yellow No
2nd LED 45.3 in (115 cm) Yellow No
3rd LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39.3 in (100 cm) Yellow No
4th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow No
5th LED 20 in (50 cm) 27.6 in (70 cm) Yellow No
6th LED 16 in (40 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) Red Yes, Intermittent
7th LED 6 in (15 cm) 11.8 in (30 cm) Red Yes, Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist will MUTE the radio, if on, when the audible warning is activated.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even
when using the Rear Park Assist. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings
and must continue to pay attention while backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the Rear Park Assist, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle, when
the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so
can result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles, because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
warning display turns the red LEDs on. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the Rear Park Assist
should only be used as a parking aid and is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
jects. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected when they
are in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist, to
be able to stop in time when an obstacle is
detected. It is recommended that you look over
your shoulder when using the Rear Park Assist.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris
to keep the system operating properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of the system.
Enabling and Disabling The Rear Park Assist
There are times when you may want to disable the Rear
Park Assist, such as when towing a trailer.
Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
You can turn the Rear Park Assist ON or OFF through the
EVIC. For details, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Vehicles Equipped With the Compass Mini-Trip
Computer (CMTC)
You can turn the Rear Park Assist ON or OFF through the
CMTC by pressing the left reset button in the instrument
cluster. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then
press and hold the RESET button for approximately two
seconds.
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The Rear Park Assist
If the Rear Park Assist malfunctions, the instrument
cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the ⴖSERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEMⴖ message. Refer to “Compass Mini Trip Com-
puter (CMTC) or “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped”, in Section 4.
If ⴖSERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEMⴖ appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), after mak-
ing sure the rear bumper is clean, please see your
authorized dealer.
Should this wrench symbol display with the
letter P next to it, your Park Sense system
needs servicing. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors, otherwise, you could
damage them.
REAR BACKUP CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Camera
System that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE. The Rear camera image will be displayed on
the uconnect™ tunes radio display screen, located on the
center stack of the instrument panel. The camera is
located in the light bar over the rear license plate.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Backup Camera System. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the Rear Camera system
should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear
Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using the Rear Camera system
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
It is recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Camera
system.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — With
Navigation Radio
1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key.
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft key.
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.
5. Press the “save” soft key.
6. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
7. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
Turning the Rear Camera On or Off — Without
Navigation Radio
1. Press the ⬙menu⬙ hard key.
2. Select ⬙system setup⬙ soft key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
⬙enable rear camera in reverse⬙ soft key.
4. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, an image of
the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to
⬙check entire surroundings⬙ displayed across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
5. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears
again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console model featured fixed incan-
descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-
age and conversation mirror. The premium front over-
head console model features a LED focused light that
illuminates the instrument panel cupholders, Infrared
Automatic Temperature Control Sensor (ATC equipped
only), two swiveling LED lights, flip-down sunglass
storage, conversation mirror, optional power sliding door
switches and an optional power liftgate switch.
NOTE: Premium sunroof console models include all of
above except sunglass storage.
Front Premium Overhead Console Features
1 — Cupholder LED 4 — Storage/Mirror
2 — ATC Sensor 5 — Switch Bank
3 — Interior Lights
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Interior Lighting
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows (LED lamps only).
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also
illuminated from a light in the overhead console (pre-
mium console only). This light is turned on when the
headlight switch is on, and will adjust in brightness when
the dimmer control is rotated up or down.
Sunglass Storage (non-sunroof only)
At the rear of the front overhead console, a compartment
is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
From the closed position, press the door over-travel latch
to open the compartment. The door will slowly rotate to
the full open position. From this position, the door can be
fully closed or, by rotating upward about 3/4 of the way
and releasing, positioned for conversation mirror use.
From the ⬙conversation mirror⬙ position, the door can
only be closed. To return to the full open position, the
door must first be closed and then opened by pressing
the over-travel latch again to release.
NOTE: The front overhead console supplied with fac-
tory sunroof, incorporates a sunroof switch.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Rear Overhead Consoles — If Equipped
The rear overhead storage system is available in two
versions: with or without sunroof.
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
down on the front foot-well area while in courtesy mode,
for added convenience.
Overhead Compartment Features
1 — DVD
1
5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD
1
3 — Interior Lights 7 — Interior Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
1
If equipped, otherwise storage.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on
when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press the lens a second time to turn each light off.
You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing
the outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Rear Console Halo Lighting
The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting
around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to ”Halo
Lights — If Equipped” under “Lights” in Section 3.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-
ceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop
and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
HomeLink威 Buttons
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
Begin Programming
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
•
After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to Step 5 “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 “Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System.”
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. It is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Using HomeLink威
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3, with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control switch is located in the front
overhead console.
The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation
or slides rearward under the roof.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Power Sunroof Operation
Opening the Sunroof Manually
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
WARNING!
In an accident, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured.
Closing the Sunroof Manually
To close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-
roof travel at any point.
Sunroof Sunshade Operation
The sunroof sunshade can be opened manually. How-
ever, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof
opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the power sun-
roof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Express-Open
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express-Open”. During Express-Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Express-Vent
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
automatically open to the vent position. This is called
“Express-Vent”.
Express-Close
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
“Express-Close”. During Express-Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
WARNING!
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 min-
utes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Auto-Express with Anti-Pinch Protection
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object.
Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to three
times in succession. After the third time, Auto Express
will enter a manual operation mode. This allows the
operator to manually control the power switch, in order
to close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Two 12-Volt power outlets are located on the lower
instrument panel, next to the open storage bin. The upper
power outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the
lower power outlet is connected directly to the battery.
The upper power outlet will also operate a conventional
cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package). To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR威 cigar
knob and element must be used.
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
One outlet in the removable floor console shares a fuse
with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also
connected to the battery. Do not exceed a maximum
power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) shared between the lower
panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet.
The outlet in the rear quarter panel near the liftgate and
the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con-
trolled by the ignition switch. Each of these outlets can
support 160 Watts (13 Amps). Do not exceed 160 Watts
(13 Amps) for each of these outlets.
The power outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a
key or battery symbol indicating the power source. The
power outlet, located on the lower instrument panel, is
powered directly from the battery. Items plugged into
this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
(Continued)
12-Volt Power Outlets
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 110-Volt, 150-Watt inverter outlet (if equipped) con-
verts DC current to AC current, and is located on the left
rear trim panel immediately behind the second row left
passenger seat. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools. Due to built-in overload protec-
tion, the power outlet will shut down if the power rating
is exceeded. Each device to be powered should be
checked first to make sure it does not exceed the outlet’s
150 Watts maximum rating.
The power inverter switch is located near the center of
the instrument panel below the two 12-Volt power out-
lets.
Power Inverter Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
To turn on the power outlet, press the switch once. Press
the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off.
CUPHOLDERS
There are nine cupholders in the interior. Two cupholders
in the center front instrument panel, four in the floor
consoles and three more are located in the third row
quarter trim panel.
All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible
liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one
edge for easy removal. Refer to “Cleaning The Instru-
ment Panel Cupholders” in Section 7.
Instrument Panel Cupholders
The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull-out
drawer just above the lower storage bin.
Power Inverter Switch
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells.
The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cupholder retention features.
Interior Bottle Holders
There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo-
dates up to a 20 oz (1 L) plastic bottle.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating.
The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
Smoker’s Package Kit — If Equipped
With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smoker’s
Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
of the two cupholders in the center front instrument
panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom-
modate a second ash receiver, if desired.
Interior Bottle Holder
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment, press inward on the
release button (2). The door will spring open about 1 in
(2.54 cm). Manually lift the front edge of the door
upward, until fully opened, and the detent is engaged.
To close the compartment door, push firmly downward
on the door’s surface to release the detent and latch the
door closed.
Lower Glove Compartment
To open the lower compartment, pull out on the release
handle (3). The lower compartment handle is also
equipped with a lock (3).
Glove Compartment Features
1 — Upper Compartment 3 — Lower Latch/Lock
2 — Upper Latch 4 — Lower Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Door Trim Panel Storage
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Driver Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The drivers seatback has a primary storage pocket on all
models and an optional secondary mesh pocket.
Front Door Storage Features
1 — Storage Pocket 3 — Bottle Holder
2 — Map Pocket 4 — Map Pocket
Driver’s Seatback Storage
1 — Bag Holder
2 — Standard Pocket
3 — Mesh Pocket
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into
the left front door entry scuff molding.
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
The area below the floor covers, located in front of the
second row seats, is available for storage.
Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
the storage bin locking mechanism to the ⬙unlocked⬙
position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
Umbrella Holder
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not operate the storage bin covers while the
vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage — If
Equipped
The overhead storage system comes in several options.
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Coat Hooks
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement
“Load To This Line”. This line indicates how far rearward
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate
closing.
Overhead Console Features
1 — DVD
1
5 — Storage
2 — Rear HVAC 6 — DVD
1
3 — Courtesy Lights 7 — Courtesy Lights
4 — Storage 8 — Halo Lighting
1
If equipped, otherwise storage.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed,4x8foot
sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor
with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved
slightly forward of the rearmost position.
CONSOLE FEATURES
There are two consoles available: Basic and Premium.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
•
The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
•
Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. Cupholders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning.
•
The cupholders are removable to access a large storage
bin.
•
The basic console is removable from the vehicle for
additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at
the console base.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console
1. Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
2. Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to
clear the rear load floor hook.
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the console.
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
1. Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly
higher than the rear).
2. Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/
hook.
3. Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole
is centered on the winch hole.
4. Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down-
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the
cover plug.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
Premium Console — If Equipped
The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
bin offers multiple configurations.
•
Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean-
ing. The cupholders can accept plastic bottles, large
cups or mugs with handles.
•
Top tray storage
•
Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs
or other items
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
•
Large console center storage will store headphones for
the available rear DVD entertainment system or other
items
•
12-Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
•
Rear occupant accessible
•
Multiple adjustments
•
Removable from vehicle for additional floor space.
The top and center console sections slide forward and
rearward to provide added user comfort. A one-piece cup
Premium Console Features
1 — Top Release 3 — Console Release
2 — Center Release
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for
cleaning. The cupholders will also accommodate large
size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles.
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders
and a convenient storage tray.
Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
storage area below.
Dual Storage Bins
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides
Console Position 1
Console Position 2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cupholders for the second row passengers.
Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers.
To Remove The Premium Floor Console
1. Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console.
2. Lift the rear of the console up several inches/
centimeters.
Console Position 3
Console Position 4
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
console.
To reinstall the console:
1. Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly
higher than the front).
2. Slide the console forward into the floor bracket.
3. Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket.
4. Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket.
5. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
NOTE:
•
You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second
time.
•
To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear win-
dow defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM
The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level
riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb screws located
at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately six
turns, then move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in place, retighten the thumb screws to lock
the crossbar into position.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has
properly locked into position.
NOTE: To help control wind noise when installing the
crossbars make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the crossbars are facing the front of the vehicle. When
the crossbars are not in use, the front crossbar should be
fastened just forward of the middle support and the rear
crossbar should be fastened at the rearmost position of
the side rails. This will help reduce the amount of wind
noise when the crossbars are not in use.
The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
•
Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral-
lel at any luggage rack position for proper func-
tion. Noncompliance could result in damage to the
luggage rack, cargo and/or vehicle.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
•
Long loads which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
•
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care-
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second and third row
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
that the sun screens attach to when pulled out.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Retracted
Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to
disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the
base sill.
Sun Screen Extended
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features .............. 243
䡵 Instrument Cluster ................... 244
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions .......... 245
䡵 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) — If
Equipped ............................ 258
▫ CMTC Reset Buttons ................ 258
▫ Compass/Temperature Display ......... 259
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped .......................... 261
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ........................... 263
▫ Trip Functions ..................... 265
▫ Compass Display ................... 266
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) .......................... 268
䡵 Sales Code (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
Radio – If Equipped .................... 273
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 273
4
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 phone
— If Equipped ...................... 273
▫ Clock Setting Procedure .............. 273
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) ............... 276
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode .... 276
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 279
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ........... 281
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . 284
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio............................... 285
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode .... 285
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 290
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files ........... 293
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 295
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) .... 295
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) — If
Equipped ............................ 296
▫ Connecting The iPod威 ................ 297
▫ Using This Feature .................. 298
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons 298
▫ Play Mode ........................ 298
▫ List Or Browse Mode ................ 300
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios
Only)............................... 302
▫ System Activation ................... 302
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 302
▫ Selecting uconnect威 studios (Satellite) Mode 303
▫ Satellite Antenna ................... 303
▫ Reception Quality ................... 303
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 studios
(Satellite) Mode ..................... 304
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 phone
(If Equipped) ....................... 306
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) ....................... 306
䡵 uconnect威 studios (Sirius Backseat TV™) — If
Equipped ............................ 307
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)™ — If
Equipped ............................ 307
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped 309
▫ Radio Operation .................... 309
▫ CD Player ........................ 310
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance ................ 310
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ...... 311
䡵 Climate Controls ..................... 311
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System ............................ 311
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
▫ Rear Manual Climate Control
— If Equipped ...................... 317
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .......................... 319
▫ Summer Operation .................. 328
▫ Winter Operation ................... 328
▫ Vacation/Storage ................... 328
▫ Window Fogging ................... 329
▫ Outside Air Intake .................. 329
▫ Operating Tips ..................... 329
▫ A/C Air Filter— If Equipped ........... 330
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Vents 5 — Analog Clock 9 — DVD – (If Equipped) 13 — Switch Bank
2 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Upper Glove Compartment 10 — Cup Holders 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Shift Lever
7 — Lower Glove Compart-
ment
11 — Storage Bin 15 — Dimmer Switch
4 — Radio 8 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Supply – 12V 16 — Headlight Switch
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
4. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
5. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
6. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6
for more information.
8. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light
The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil-
ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
11. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
/ Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
15. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
accelerator.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
16. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
17. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in Section 2 for more information.
19. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious
conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for seven
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
21. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized deal-
ership for service.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
22. Trip / Odometer Display Reset Button — Base
Cluster / Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (0 km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
NOTE: On the Base cluster, the reset button toggles
between odometer, Trip A, Trip B and outside tempera-
ture. To reset a message display on Base Cluster (Change
Oil Required, gASCAP, gATE, LoCOOL, LoWASH, no-
FUSE), push and hold the button until the display resets
(approximately two seconds).
23. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. Message Display Area
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
odometer messages will display:
CHAngE OIL ...............OilChange Required
HOTOIL ...............Transaxle Oil Temperature
Exceeds Safe Threshold
door ............................. Door Ajar
gATE ........................... Liftgate Ajar
gASCAP .......................Fuel Cap Fault
hood ............................Hood Ajar
noFUSE .......................... Fuse Fault
LoCOOL ........................ LowCoolant
LoWASH .................... LowWasher Fluid
LoW tirE.....................LowTirePressure
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in
the Compass Mini-Trip Computer / Electronic Vehicle
Information Center Display Area located in the instru-
ment cluster.
Refer to ”Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
Display— If Equipped” / ”Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) Display — If Equipped” later in this
section, for more information.
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
HOTOIL
When this message is displayed there is a transaxle
over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs,
the “HOTOIL” message will be displayed in the odom-
eter along with a chime.
If this message appears, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL, until the light goes off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
NOTE: When this message is displayed, bring the
vehicle to a stop and idle the engine until the message
clears.
CHAngE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds, after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip / Odometer Display reset button on the
instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
perform the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
25. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service, so that the correct mileage
can be determined.
26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) or Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display— If
Equipped
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display — If
Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini-Trip Com-
puter (CMTC), the display provides the outside tempera-
ture, one of eight compass headings to indicate the
direction the vehicle is facing, and the current radio
station. For more information refer to “Compass Mini-
Trip Computer” in this section.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
— If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For more information refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in this section.
27. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display
Button
Press the left reset button to scroll through sub-menus
(i.e., Outside Temperature, Trip Functions: AVG Fuel
Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units). Press and hold
the reset button for approximately two seconds, to reset
the display shown.
28. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE:
•
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimi-
nating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
•
If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler uconnect™
gps (Navigation Radio), the NAV system will provide
the compass direction, and the variance and calibra-
tion menus will be unavailable. The compass will
perform accurately, based on GPS signals instead of
the Earths magnetic field.
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer is located in the
instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive dis-
play (displays information on outside temperature, com-
pass direction, and trip information).
CMTC Reset Buttons
CMTC Reset Button
Press the left reset button located on the instrument
cluster to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Trip Functions:
AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the
ON position, then press and hold the reset button for
approximately two seconds.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display:
NE .......Eight-point compass headings are displayed
(N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
14°F............ Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
AV G ......... AverageFuel Economy (U.S. or Metric)
DTE .......................Distance to Empty
ET ............................ Elapsed Time
P..........................ParkAssist On/Off
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Should this wrench symbol display with the
letter P next to it, your Park Assist System
needs servicing. Contact an authorized dealer.
CMTC Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Press and release the right button on the instrument
cluster to switch from odometer, to trip A or trip B. Press
and hold the right button, while the odometer/trip
odometer is displayed, to reset.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Compass/Temperature Display
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-
racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-
ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE:
•
A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad
tracks, etc.
•
Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell
phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
panel. This is where the compass module is located
and such devices may interfere and cause false com-
pass readings.
To Set the Variance
Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold the CMTC
reset button (for approximately ten seconds) until the
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to increase
the variance one step. Repeat as necessary until the
desired variance is achieved.
NOTE: The factory default zone is 8. During program-
ming, the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to
zone 1.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-
ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
Compass Variance Map
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Press and hold the CMTC reset button (for approxi-
mately 10 seconds) until the current variance zone num-
ber is displayed.
3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
again for approximately 10 seconds, until the direction is
displayed, with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
display.
4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circles, under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
System Status display
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System
•
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
•
Compass display
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
Audio Modes display
EVIC Menu / Step Control Button, as
it appears on the left side of the steer-
ing column.
Press and release the MENU button, and the
mode displayed will change between
Compass/Temperature, Trip, System Status,
and Personal Settings.
Press the STEP button to scroll through sub
menus (i.e., Trip Functions, Avg. Fuel Economy,
DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units).
Steering Wheel EVIC Compass/Temp
Control Button, as it appears on the
right side of the steering column.
Press and release the Compass/Temperature
button to for instant access to the Compass/
Temperature screens.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press this button to RESET Trip Functions and
change Personal Settings.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime, if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
•
Hood Ajar (if equipped with hood switch)
•
Check TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System” in Section 5 of this manual)
•
Turn Signal On
•
RKE Battery Low
•
LOW WASHER FLUID
•
Oil Change Required
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
•
Park Assist Disabled
•
Service Park Assist System
•
Personal Settings Not Available — Vehicle Not in Park
•
Blind Spot System Off — This message is displayed
when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind
Spot System has been turned off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
•
Blind Spot System Not Available — This message is
displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block-
age, electronic interference, or other ⬙temporary⬙ con-
ditions. When this message is displayed both outside
rear view icons will be illuminated. If electronic inter-
ference is present, the BSM system will illuminate the
icon only on the side of interference as long as
interference is present.
•
Service Blind Spot System — This message is dis-
played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
system is permanently unavailable. The driver will
receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn-
ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated. If
this message is present see an authorized dealer.
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds,
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
perform the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC.
Press the STEP button to scroll through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Display Units of Measure in:
To make your selection, press and release the STEP
button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset the Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the RESET button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
resettable functions, press and release the RESET button
a second time, within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function (Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window).
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight com-
pass readings, and the outside temperature.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali-
bration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” mes-
sage, and the last variance zone number, displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the STEP button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAILABLE ,
followed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
tings displays in the EVIC.
Use the Step button to display one of the following
choices.
Compass Variance Map
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the RESET button while in this display to select English,
Spanish (Español), French (Français), Italian (Italiano),
German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as
you continue, the information will display in the selected
language.
Auto Door Locks
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until ON or OFF appears.
Auto UNLK On Exit
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until ON or OFF appears.
RKE Unlock
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button twice, to unlock the passen-
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until “Driver Door
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings will return to the memory set position
when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. If
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
this feature is not selected then the memory seat, mirror,
and radio settings can only return to the memory set
position using the door mounted switch. Pressing the
RESET button when in this display will select ⬙Yes⬙ or
⬙No.⬙
Flash Lamp Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the RESET button until
ON or OFF appears.
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90
appears.
Easy Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Easy Entry/Exit Seat” under “Driver
Memory Seat” in Section 3 of this manual for more
information.
Tilt MIRR. In Reverse
When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in
a reverse gear, the side mirrors tilt downward to allow
the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid
objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, uconnect™ phone (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until Off, 45 sec.,
5 min., or 10 min. appears.
ILLUMIN. Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the RESET button until “OFF,”
“30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
Blind Spot Alert
There are 3 selections when operating Blind Spot Alert.
By pressing and releasing the RESET button once, the
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind Spot
Alert Lights” mode. When this mode is selected the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By pressing
and releasing the RESET button a second time “Blind
Spot Alert Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this mode
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in
the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the
turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot Alert Off” is selected
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Park ASST. System
When enable is selected, the Rear Park Assist System is
activated. When disable is selected the system is deacti-
vated and the instrument cluster will display the ⬙PARK
ASSIST DISABLED⬙ message. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until ENABLE or
DISABLE appears.
Display Units of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC
appears.
Door Alert
When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate
when power or manual sliding doors are in operation,
signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or
entering the vehicle.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp Lock
feature. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate,
and remain on for up to 90 seconds, when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec-
tion, press and release the RESET button until OFF,
30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears. Refer to “SmartBeams” in
Section 3.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on
the windshield. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. When
OFF is selected, the system reverts to the standard
intermittent wiper operation.
SALES CODE (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
RADIO – IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
Refer to your uconnect威 tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
uconnect威 gps — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES Radio
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
RES/RSC Radio
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character Dis-
play
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code
RER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCI
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s
Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an option
with these radios.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the
vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
the provided interface cable.
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and
iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
compartment on some vehicles).
•
Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below.
NOTE:
•
You may have to remove the connector pin protection
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-
ing the cable.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
•
If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using the provided connection cable to connect an
iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
•
The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
•
The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
iPod威 and display data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this
button at any other time in the track, will jump to
the beginning of the current track.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will take you to the beginning
of the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is
pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this
button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
in the list.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take
you back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
mode to repeat the current playing track.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.
During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next
tracks.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威.IftheRND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
the information on the radio display.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 - Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow
the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this
system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow
the device manufacturer’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the
device and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving.
Failure to follow this warning could result in an
accident.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
uconnect姞 studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS
ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting uconnect姞 studios (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 studios
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
uconnect姞 studios (SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™) —
IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video. The subscription
service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio. SIRIUS Back-
seat TV™ offers three video channels for family enter-
tainment, directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES)™, RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-
tailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)™ is
available with:
•
One or two video screens
•
Third row swivel screen — If Equipped
•
Additional single-disc DVD player with two-screen
system
•
Battery-powered two-channel remote control
•
Two remote headphones
•
Integrated remote storage in either screen location
•
Three different medias can be played simultaneously
(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)
•
Easy menu-driven functions on touch-screen radios
•
Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating
area
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
•
Ten different medias to choose from in each screen
(AM, FM, Sirius Radio, Sirius Backseat TV™, DVD1,
DVD2, Hard Disc Drive (HDD), AUX in radio, AUX1,
AUX2)
The LCD screen(s) are located in the overhead compart-
ment console.
NOTE: Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Overhead Video Screens
VES™ Remote Control Location
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel, at the three and nine
o’clock positions.
The right-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center, and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes
the operation of the radio from AM to FM, or Tape to CD
mode, depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
The left-hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different,
depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand rocker switch op-
eration in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station, and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
The button located in the center of the left-hand switch
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain
a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These
comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior
conditions.
Manual Temperature Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area indicates cooler tempera-
tures. Rotating the knob clockwise,
into the red area, indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several selections of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Press this button to choose between outside air
intake or recirculation of the air inside the
vehicle. A lamp will illuminate when you are in
RECIRCULATION mode. Only use the RECIR-
CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside
odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly
upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
•
If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in MIX, DEFROST, or FLOOR mode the
RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times
and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode
is not allowed.
•
Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULA-
TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For
maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
•
In order to prevent fogging, when the RECIRCULA-
TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to
PANEL, the A/C will engage automatically.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push on this button to engage the Air Condition-
ing (A/C). A light will illuminate when the A/C
System is engaged
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Max A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULA-
TION mode buttons at the same time.
Three-Zone Temperature Control — If Equipped
With the Three-Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the Heat-
ing, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning operations coming
from the outlets on their side of the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel con-
trols rear Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
operations.
Front Upper Three Zone Temperature Control
1 – Left Temperature 7 – Right Temperature
2 – PANEL 8 – Rear DEFROST
3 – BI-LEVEL 9 – RECIRCULATION
4 – Front Blower 10 – Front DEFROST
5 – FLOOR 11 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
6–MIX
Front Lower Three-Zone Temperature Control Features
1 – Left Heated Seat 3 – Rear Temperature
2 – Rear Blower 4 – Right Heated Seat
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
The Three-Zone Temperature Control bottom panel has
five positions; off, rear, and a range of blower speeds.
Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in
the rear (RR) position do the second row seat occupants
have control of the rear blower speed.
Rear Manual Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air
outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door, and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
1 – Rear Blower 3 – Rear Climate Control Lock
2 – Rear Temperature 4 – Rear MODE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
RR position do the second row seat occupants have
control of the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the pas-
senger side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The heater outlets are located in the passenger side
trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not block
or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
heater outlets. The electrical system could overload,
causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
When the blower knob on the front climate control unit is
set to any position other than the rear temperature
settings will be controlled by the rear temperature control
knob on the front climate control unit. The rear mode
selection RR, allows the settings to be controlled by the
rear mode control knob.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated, and
the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera-
tion. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when
the front control is in the PANEL mode. When the front
unit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted from
both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
control is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflow
will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
•
Front Three-Zone ATC allows both driver and front
passenger seat occupant, and rear seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
•
Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation
by a button press on the right rotary knob and a
comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the
control unit.
•
The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
•
SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting for the cabin, if desired.
The Three-Zone ATC System automatically maintains the
interior comfort level desired by the driver and all
passengers. The system automatically adjusts the air
temperature, the airflow volume, amount of outside air
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
recirculation and the airflow direction. This maintains a
comfortable temperature, even under changing condi-
tions.
Front Upper ATC Panel
1 - System On/Off 9 - Air Conditioning (A/C) On/Off
2 - Blower Indicator 10 - AUTO Mode / Blower
3 - Left Front Temperature 11 - Front MODE
4 - Rear Blower / Temperature /
Mode
12 - RECIRCULATE
5 - SYNC Indicator 13 - Front DEFROST
6 - A/C Indicator 14 - Front Blower Speed
7 - Right Front Temperature 15 - SYNC
8 - Front MODE Indicator
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Panel
and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC
display, along with three temperatures for driver, front
passenger, and rear seats. The system will then automati-
cally regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, front passen-
ger, and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
Front Lower ATC Panel
1 - Rear Blower Speed 4 - Rear ATC Lock
2 - Rear Temperature / Rear
System On/Off
5 - Rear DEFROST
3 - Rear MODE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front
ATC display, until the engine warms up. The fan will
engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected, or
by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker
button and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati-
cally.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker
button. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
additional speeds are selected. This allows the front
occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted for direction,
and turned on or off to control airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets. A slight amount of air is
also directed through the side window demister outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfort-
able, while keeping the windshield clear.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
The SNOWFLAKE mode, or A/C button, allows
the operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When in SNOWFLAKE
mode, and the ATC display is on cool, dehumidified air
flows through the air outlets. If ECONOMY mode is
desired, press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the
SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display, and deactivate
the A/C system.
NOTE:
•
If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the SNOW-
FLAKE can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control
button. RECIRCULATION mode should only be used
temporarily. The recirculation symbol will illuminate in
the display when this button is selected. Push the button
a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode
LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATION
mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RE-
CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIX
and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op-
eration. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if
these modes are selected.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of
the right side sliding door, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System is
on the front lower ATC panel located on the instrument
panel.
Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC
System from the front lower ATC panel, illuminates a
LOCK symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
and air source are controlled from the front lower ATC
panel.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off.
The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed 3 - Rear ATC Lock
2 - Rear Temperature 4 - Rear MODE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATC
panel. This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear
temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric
units by selecting the “Display Units of Measure in”
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — Customer-
Programmable Features” in this Section.
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the passenger side trim panel behind the third row
seats. The heater outlets are located in the passenger
side trim panel, just behind the sliding door. Do not
block or place objects directly in front of the inlet
grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could
overload causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
ture. The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the
front upper ATC panel.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the
LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
pants.
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this
manual for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in section 7 of this manual for proper coolant
selection. Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in
fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
DEFROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
Operating Tips
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
A/C Air Filter— If Equipped
On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to “Air Conditioning” in
Section 7 of this manual for filter replacement
instructions.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures ................... 334
▫ Automatic Transaxle ................. 334
▫ Normal Starting .................... 334
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or
–29°C) ............................ 335
▫ If The Engine Fails To Start ............ 335
▫ After Starting ...................... 336
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ....... 336
䡵 Automatic Transaxle .................. 337
▫ Brake/Transaxle Interlock System ....... 337
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transaxle .......................... 338
▫ Gear Ranges ...................... 339
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............ 344
▫ Acceleration ....................... 344
▫ Traction .......................... 344
䡵 Driving Through Water ................ 345
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ................ 345
5
▫ Shallow Standing Water .............. 345
䡵 Power Steering ...................... 347
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ........... 348
䡵 Parking Brake ....................... 349
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 350
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light ......... 352
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System .......... 353
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) .......... 353
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ............. 354
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ....... 355
▫ ESP/BAS Warning Light .............. 356
䡵 Tire Safety Information ................ 357
▫ Tire Markings ..................... 357
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ........ 361
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ......... 362
䡵 Tires — General Information ............ 366
▫ Tire Pressure ...................... 366
䡵 Tire Chains ......................... 373
䡵 Snow Tires ......................... 375
䡵 Tire Rotation ........................ 375
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...... 376
▫ Base System ....................... 378
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ........ 380
䡵 Fuel Requirements .................... 384
▫ 3.3L/3.8L Gasoline Engine ............. 384
▫ 4.0L Gasoline Engine ................ 385
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ............... 385
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........... 386
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ..... 386
▫ MMT In Gasoline ................... 387
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .............. 387
▫ Fuel System Cautions ................ 387
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........... 388
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.3L Engines Only) — If
Equipped ............................ 389
▫ E-85 General Information ............. 389
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) .................. 390
▫ Fuel Requirements .................. 390
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles E-85 And Gasoline Vehicles ....... 391
▫ Starting .......................... 392
▫ Cruising Range .................... 392
▫ Replacement Parts .................. 392
▫ Maintenance ...................... 392
䡵 Adding Fuel ........................ 393
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............. 393
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .......... 394
䡵 Vehicle Loading ..................... 395
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ............. 395
䡵 Trailer Towing ....................... 399
▫ Common Towing Definitions ........... 399
▫ Towing Tips ....................... 411
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) 413
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
•
Never leave unattended children alone in a ve-
hicle. Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Do not leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transaxle
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
Normal Starting
1. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
ignition switch to the START position and release it as
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running.
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds,
then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure (Steps 1–3
above).
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transaxle shift
interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed
to shift out of PARK.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or –29°C)
Follow the same instructions in the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If The Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in Section 6 of this manual.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the
engine for more than 15–second intervals at one time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15–
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the electrical cord
to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the electrical cord before
driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord
could cause electrocution.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
•
Move the shift lever into PARK only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Do not move the shift lever from REVERSE,
PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when
the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before moving the shift lever into any gear, make
sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transaxle Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
for the interlock system. In order to override this system,
remove the cover located to the top right of the shift lever
in the instrument panel. The override can be activated by
pressing the white-colored tab, which can be accessed
through the hole in the instrument panel. While the
override is pressed, the shift lever can be moved out of
the PARK position without pressing the brake pedal.
After operation, return the cover to its original position.
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents moving the
shift lever out of PARK, unless the key is in the ACC/ON
position, and the brake pedal is pressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic Transaxle
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-10°F (-23°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
The electronically-controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The transaxle has only PRND shift positions. Downshifts
are carried out by an Electronic Range Select (ERS) by
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
moving the lever—/ + while in the DRIVE position, the
instrument cluster will display transaxle gear selection as
6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 for six-speed, and 4, 3, 2, 1 for four-speed
transaxles.
Gear Ranges
Do not race the engine when moving the shift lever from
PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transaxle. The engine can be started in this gear. Never
attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
gear.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should
always move the shift lever into PARK, remove the
key from the ignition, and apply the parking
brake. Once the key is removed from the ignition,
the shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
children or pets inside a vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have placed the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When moving the shift lever into PARK, press the
button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all
the way forward until it stops.
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure the shift lever is in the PARK position.
•
When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
the shift lever rearward without pressing the shift
lever button.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition from OFF to ACC/ON so the steer-
ing wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise,
damage to the steering column or shift lever could
result.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE — Six-Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) mode by moving the lever—/+and
select the “5” range when frequent transaxle shifting
occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
(i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions,
using the “5” range will improve performance and
extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and
heat buildup.
DRIVE — Four-Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, select the “3” range
when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling
into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers).
Under these conditions, using the “3” range will improve
performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
CAUTION!
If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac-
ceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
DRIVE and select “5” range (on six-speed transaxles)
or “3” range (on four-speed transaxles) by changing
shift points. This is done to prevent transaxle damage
due to overheating.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
you to move the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) when
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, this allows the
selection of the desired top gear. For example, if you shift
the transaxle into third gear, the transaxle will never shift
above third gear, but can shift down to second or first
gear automatically, when needed.
Switching from ERS to DRIVE can be done at any vehicle
speed. To shift from DRIVE mode to ERS mode, move the
shift lever to the left (-) once. The current gear will be
maintained as the top gear. To disable ERS, simply press
and hold the shift lever to the right (+) until “D” is
displayed in the instrument cluster odometer.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
Odometer
Screen Display
123456D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed (Six-
Speed Trans-
axle)
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed (Four-
Speed Trans-
axle)
1 1-2 1-3 1-4
N/A N/A
1–4
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-). The transaxle will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transaxle
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle automatically shifts into second
gear (third gear for six-speed). The transaxle remains in
second gear (third gear for six-speed) despite the forward
gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transaxle.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transaxle can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Restart the engine.
5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
layer of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position. To release the parking brake, press the
emergency brake pedal a second time and let your foot
up as you feel the brake disengage.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
WARNING!
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave the transaxle in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
You may experience the following when the brake system
goes into anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
•
A clicking sound of solenoid valves
•
Brake pedal pulsations
•
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
WARNING!
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-
cated electronic equipment that may be suscep-
tible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled, or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
•
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-
tors the anti-lock brake system. The light will
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb
repaired as soon as possible.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Consult with your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Program (ESP). These systems complement the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
braking capability during emergency braking maneu-
vers.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
functions similarly to a limited-slip differential, and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
the ESP is in the “Partial Off” mode.
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” (in the instru-
ment cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
This indicates that the TCS is active. If the
indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions, and do not switch off the ESP or TCS.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
WARNING!
•
The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded.
•
The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-
ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak-
ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions.
(Continued)
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-
ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) enhances direc-
tional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESP corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESP on
two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESP should
only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
ESP Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESP
OFF” switch (located in the center switch bank, next to
the hazard flasher switch).
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light”
will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off” mode, ESP
will operate without engine torque management. This
mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
than ESP would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESP on again, momentarily press the
“ESP OFF” switch. This will restore the normal “ESP On”
mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESP OFF” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Light
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is
combined with BAS. The “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) both come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Light” comes on continuously with the engine run-
ning, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or
the BAS system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles/kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
Warning Light” come on momentarily, each time the
ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal. The sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive, following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-
dards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure.
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted, and
the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage, at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated, even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature is 32°F (0°C), then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original-equipment information, or an
authorized tire dealer, for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High-speed driving, with your vehicle at or above
maximum load, is dangerous. The added strain on
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
•
Temporary-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive faster than
50 mph (80 km/h).
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
•
Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h),
or for more than 30 seconds continuously, without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gen-
erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone.
•
Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h), or for more than 30 seconds
continuously, when you are stuck; and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original-equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Tire Life
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors, including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Please see “Tread Wear
Indicators” and “Tire and Loading Information” placard
for the size designation of your tire. The service descrip-
tion and load identification will be found on the original-
equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of
your vehicle. We recommend that you contact your
original-equipment manufacturer, or an authorized tire
dealer, with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, than what was originally equipped on
your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index
could result in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•
Use chains on P225/65R16 tires only. P225/65R17
tires do not provide adequate clearance.
•
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
0.5 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
pavement.
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-
turer, if different from the speed recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
chains.
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
TIRE ROTATION
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on All-Season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
The suggested rotation method is shown in the following
diagram.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements
found on the tire placard located on the driver’s-side
B-pillar.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to the “Tires – General Information” in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
Tire Rotation
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure
in order for the “TPMS Warning Lamp” to be turned off.
The system will automatically update and the “TPMS
Warning Lamp” will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “TPMS
Warning Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
“TPMS Warning Light” will still be on. In this situation,
the “TPMS Warning Light” will turn off only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam-
age. Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPMS Warning Lamp.”
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
TPMS Telltale Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure
Warnings
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illu-
minate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
dible chime will be activated when one or more
of the four active road tire pressures are low.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold
tire pressure value (located on the placard on the
driver’s-side B-Pillar). The system will automatically
update and the “TPMS Warning Lamp” will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
The “TPMS Warning Lamp” will flash on and off for
75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
ing the system fault still exists. The “TPMS Warning
Lamp” will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turn
on.
3. After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will re-
main on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the “TPMS
Telltale Warning Light” will turn off as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for
the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires.
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
•
Receiver Module
•
Four TPMS Sensors
•
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graph-
ics displaying tire pressures
•
Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be acti-
vated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display a
Low Pressure message for three seconds and a graphic
display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
flashing.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
Low Tire Pressure Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will extinguish once
the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Message
The “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault
is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
three seconds. This text message is then followed by a
graphic display, with --in place of the pressure value(s)
indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will
no longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message
Check TPM System Display
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
will not be present, and a pressure value will be dis-
played instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any
of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around
the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure
in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale
Warning Light” will remain on, a chime will sound, and
the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the
graphic display.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM
SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Warning Light” will turn off and the
graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below
the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.3L/3.8L Gasoline Engine
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
4.0L Gasoline Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of 89 octane for
optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be-
fore considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives are not needed under
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
•
To prevent carbon monoxide poisoning DO NOT
inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monox-
ide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
•
NEVER run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and NEVER sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.3L ENGINES ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve-
hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
E-85 Badge
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat-
ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom-
mended.
When you do switch fuel types, it is recommended that:
•
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
•
you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km)
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
hard starting and rough idle following start-up, even if
the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E–85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
E-85 and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E–85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an equivalent oil
meeting the specification MS-6395.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30% compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow
indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located on, is located in the
instrument cluster, just below the fuel gauge.
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: The driver’s side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
fuel door.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
turn on, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and will cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
•
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” may come on. Be sure the gas cap
is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the gASCAP message is displayed in the instrument
cluster, this signifies a leak or change in the evaporative
system is detected. Sometimes this is the result of a
loosely fitting (or possibly damaged) filler cap. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset
button to turn the gASCAP message off.
Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time
the vehicle is refueled.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) — Rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle,
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way
the brakes operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
LOADING TABLE — EXAMPLE ONLY
Front Axle Rear Axle
Empty Weight 2,140 lbs
(971 kg)
1,470 lbs
(667 kg)
Load (Driver,
passengers, and
cargo/luggage)
360 lbs (163 kg) 980 lbs (445 kg)
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOADING TABLE — EXAMPLE ONLY
Front Axle Rear Axle
TOTAL 2,500 lbs
(1 134 kg)
2,450 lbs
(1 111 kg)
GAWR 2,544 lbs
(1 154 kg)
2,544 lbs
(1 154 kg)
A loaded vehicle is shown in the above table. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at-
tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR’s. This table is only an example.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing-related definitions will as-
sist you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball
by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10%
or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of
hitch is the most popular on the market today and is
commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer’s axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights (TW), and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
•
Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with an authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer
or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory-equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See an authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow, and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS
Class
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
Improper Adjustment of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transaxle
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.3L, 3.8L and 4.0L/
Automatic
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 1,800 lbs
(816 kg)
180 lbs (82 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 1,350 lbs
(612 kg)
135 lbs (61 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 1,000 lbs
(454 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine/Transaxle
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
3.8L and 4.0L/
Automatic (with
Tow Package)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Up to 2 persons &
Luggage 3,800 lbs
(1 723 kg)*
380 lbs (172 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
3 to 5 persons &
Luggage 3,350 lbs
(1 519 kg)*
335 lbs (152 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
6 to 7 persons &
Luggage 3,000 lbs
(1 360 kg)*
300 lbs (136 kg)
* For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg).
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to
Tire–Safety Information in this section of the manual.
Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side-to-side,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the “Tire-Safety Information” section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-
age your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to Section 8 of this manual. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transaxle, steering, suspension, chassis
structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weight
as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” in this section for proper
tire inflation procedures.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor-
mation” in this section for the proper inspection
procedure.
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-
tion” in this section for proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
connector illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transaxle
The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, move the shift
lever into third gear (with four-speed transaxle) or fifth
gear (with six-speed transaxle).
NOTE: Moving the shift lever into third gear (with
four-speed transaxle) or fifth gear (with six-speed trans-
axle) while operating the vehicle under heavy operating
conditions will improve performance and extend trans-
axle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Main-
tenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this manual for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
•
Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before tow-
ing.
•
The six-speed automatic transaxle is sealed and re-
quires an authorized dealer to check the transaxle
fluid.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
•
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating,
take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle (flat-
towing with all four wheels on the ground) is not
recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ............... 416
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats ............... 416
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing .............. 418
▫ Jack Location ...................... 418
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 430
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................ 432
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle .............. 433
▫ Towing With The Ignition Key .......... 433
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel above the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, shift the transmission
shift lever into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine
idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C can help remove this heat.
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
•
You can also turn the Temperature Control to maxi-
mum heat, the Mode Control to floor and the Fan
Control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for
service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
•
If it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from
under the vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit.
Jack Location
The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack
handle, and tools.
Jack And Tool Location
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located
under the center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch
mechanism. The “spare tire drive” nut is located on the
floor, under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console.
NOTE: The base console, if equipped, must be removed
to raise and lower the spare tire. Refer to “Console
Features” in Section 3 for the console removal procedure.
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-
sembled into a spare tire hook; to remove the compact
spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
Winch “T” Handle; to raise/lower the compact spare
tire/cover assembly.
Tools
1A – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 1) 2A – Winch “T” Handle (Piece
1)
1B – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 2) 2B – Winch “T” Handle (Piece
2)
1C – Spare Tire Hook (Piece 3) 2C – Winch “T” Handle (Piece
3)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
2. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T’ and
fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate the
nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning
freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow
you to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
3. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire/cover
assembly from under the vehicle.
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
NOTE: If either front tire is flat, it may be necessary to
jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
cover assembly from under the vehicle. Refer to jack
engagement locations in the following steps for proper
jack placement.
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. When the compact spare tire/cover assembly is clear
of the vehicle, stand the tire/cover assembly upright and
remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retainer
tabs together.
Spare Tire Hook And Removal
Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
5. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange
of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
•
Rear jack locations are between a pair of down-facing
tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body.
•
Front jack locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle
side body, and is located 6 in. (150 mm) from door
edge.
424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Locations
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 5.
6. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is securely engaged.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
8. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
9. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered.
NOTE:
•
Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare.
•
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel
covers.
426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the
left.
11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
service station.
12. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
13. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
cover assembly. in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full-
sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible.
14. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
a “T” and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut.
Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism
clicks at least three times.
15. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools.
16. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as required.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally, to
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or
the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts
should then be tightened to recommended torque.
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m).
Secure The Spare Tire As Follows:
1. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a “T”
and fit the winch “T” handle over the drive nut. Rotate
the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops
turning freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to
allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the
vehicle.
WARNING!
A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-
pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
provided.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch “T” handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the
spare tire hook, and pull the wheel spacer from under the
vehicle.
428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is
down, and place the tire into the spare tire/cover assem-
bly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the
wheel and spare tire/cover assembly, so that the two
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on
the opposite side.
CAUTION!
The compact spare tire/cover assembly must be used
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the
compact spare tire.
WARNING!
Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
have been properly extended through the center of
the wheel and spare tire/cover assembly. Failure to
properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
loss of the spare tire and cover assembly, which will
cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle
control.
4. Using the winch “T” handle, rotate the drive nut to the
right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed specifically to
stow a compact spare tire only. Do not attempt to use
the winch to stow the full size flat tire, or any other
full-size tire. Vehicle damage may result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to push or tow the vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from another
vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-
ing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching
booster cables, or allow the clamps to touch each
other. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
contaminated area immediately with large quanti-
ties of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12-Volts. Do not allow
booster cable clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Take special care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. The cooling fan is
electrically operated and can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
•
During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above the
freezing point before attempting a jump-start.
When jump-starting, proceed as follows:
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry,
such as watch bands or bracelets, that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When a boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
do not let the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place
the automatic transmission shift lever into PARK and
turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for both
vehicles.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end
of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other, as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery, and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure there is a
good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could
cause the battery to explode.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than the jump-starting process
listed could result in:
•
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
•
Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
•
Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then move the shift lever back and forth
between REVERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelera-
tor pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion, with-
out spinning the wheels, is most effective.
432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when starting
off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to
switch the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) to “Partial
Off” mode. For further information on ESC refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in Section 5.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. Do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
CAUTION!
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 35 mph (55 km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions:
•
The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
•
The distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 miles
(160 km).
•
The towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/h).
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433
CAUTION!
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmis-
sion gear failure.
If the transmission is inoperative, or if the vehicle is to be
towed more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels off the ground.
CAUTION!
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in
the LOCK or ACC positions.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Towing Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the OFF position. The only approved
method of towing without the ignition key is with a
flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a
front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage
may occur.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.3/3.8L ......... 439
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.0L ............ 440
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ..... 441
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message — Gascap . . 441
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 442
䡵 Replacement Parts .................... 443
䡵 Dealer Service ....................... 444
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ................ 444
▫ Engine Oil ........................ 445
▫ Engine Oil Filter .................... 448
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............. 448
▫ Exhaust System .................... 449
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ............. 451
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ........... 452
▫ Body Lubrication ................... 455
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ............. 455
▫ Cooling System .................... 457
7
▫ Brakes ............................ 462
▫ Automatic Transaxle .................. 465
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 468
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . . 473
䡵 Fuses .............................. 473
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) . . . 473
䡵 Vehicle Storage ....................... 482
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs ................ 482
䡵 Bulb Replacement ..................... 483
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
— If Equipped ...................... 483
▫ Quad Headlamps .................... 484
▫ Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp ........... 484
▫ Front Side Marker Lamp ............... 485
▫ Fog Lamp ......................... 485
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker
And Backup Lamp ................... 486
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) .......................... 487
▫ License Lamp ....................... 487
䡵 Fluids And Capacities .................. 488
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 489
▫ Engine ............................ 489
▫ Chassis ........................... 490
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.3/3.8L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (3.3L Only) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Battery 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.0L
1 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
2 — Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Battery 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Totally Integrated Power Module
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
•
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message — gASCAP
Should the “Loose Fuel Filler Cap” or “gASCAP” mes-
sage appear, there may be a problem in the evaporative
system. Before taking the vehicle into an authorized
dealer, check first to see if the fuel filler cap is possibly
loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the
message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. If the problem
is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the prob-
lem will turn the MIL light off. Take your vehicle in to an
authorized dealer.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler LLC dealer-
ship or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.3L & 3.8L
Gasoline Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
“Engine Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 4.0L Gasoline
Engines
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. Your engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
“Engine Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica-
tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number,
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut OFF and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be
checked at this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer, or other
authorized service facility, using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer-approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to prop-
erly install the filter will result in the need to replace
it more often.
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium-based grease such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-
tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
function.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR威 All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro-
tection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
(Continued)
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze), a minimum
solution of 50% recommended MOPAR威 Antifreeze/
Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water
should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are antici-
pated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing the
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service atten-
dant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature
is satisfactory, the coolant bottle only needs to be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents
of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of
the condenser clean.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Brakes
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
WARNING!
•
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
or which may occur by leaving the top of your
master cylinder reservoir uncovered or the top off
of the brake fluid bottle off, allowing it to absorb
moisture may result in sudden brake failure dur-
ing hard prolonged braking. You could have an
accident.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container (both as to bottles and the master
cylinder remaining covered) to avoid contamina-
tion from foreign matter or moisture. Brake fluid,
unlike many other fluids, actually absorbs mois-
ture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the fluid and may cause it to boil during hard
braking and create a soft pedal pressure resistance
as the gas compresses. This condition does not
apply adequate pressure to the brakes to function
properly.
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid, all brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or complete
brake failure leading to a crash.
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transaxle
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
All four–speed transaxles are equipped with a conven-
tional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it should
be added through the filler tube.
All six–speed transaxles are equipped with a capped
dipstick tube. It is sealed and should not be tampered
with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to
ensure that the fluid level is set properly.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in
this section for the correct fluid type. It is important that
the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed
level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transaxle; only the approved
lubricant may be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transaxle shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts” in this sec-
tion for the correct fluid type.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
Fluid Level Check — 3.8L and 4.0L Engines with
Six-Speed Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
The six-speed automatic transaxle is a sealed unit and has
no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the
transaxle fluid checked or serviced.
Fluid Level Check — 3.3L Engine with Four-Speed
Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator on the
lower right side.
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
following procedure must be used:
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion, ending with the shift lever in PARK. Wipe the area
around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
dirt entering the transaxle.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the fingertips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80°F (27°C).
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove the dipstick and note reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
If the fluid level indicates that it is low, add sufficient
fluid to bring it to the proper level.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing
fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated
properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals.
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
and filter should be changed.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transaxle sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
•
Stone and gravel impact
•
Insects, tree sap and tar
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
•
Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective
finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean,
damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean, then
MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary.
Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use MOPAR威
Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight
and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head-
lights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if
the buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM)
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the
applicable “Engine Compartment” illustration in this
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
section. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-
fuses. A label that identifies each component may be
printed or embossed on the inside of the cover.
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Integrated
Power Module, and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the
following table.
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J1 40 Amp
Green
— Power Folding Seat
J2 30 Amp
Pink
— Power Liftgate
Module
J3 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Door Module
(RR Door Node)
J4 25 Amp
Natural
— Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp
Natural
— Passenger Door
Node
J6 40 Amp
Green
— Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
Pump/ESP
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J7 30 Amp
Pink
— Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)
Valve/ESP
J8 40 Amp
Green
— Power Memory
Seat (If Equipped)
J9 40 Amp
Green
— PZEV Motor/Flex
Fuel
J10 30 Amp
Pink
— Headlamp Wash
Relay/Manifold
Tuning Valve
J11 30 Amp
Pink
— Power Sliding Door
Module/Thatchum
Relay Lock Feed
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
— Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Main
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J14 40 Amp
Green
— Rear Window De-
fogger
J15 30 Amp
Pink
— Rear Blower
J17 40 Amp
Green
— Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp
Blue
— Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Trans Range
J19 60 Amp
Yellow
— Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp
Pink
— Front Wiper LO/HI
J21 20 Amp
Blue
— Front/Rear Washer
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
J22 25 Amp
Natural
— Sunroof Module
M1 — 15 Amp
Blue
Center High
Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL)/
Brake Switch
M2———
M3 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Spare Fuse
M4 — 10 Amp
Red
Trailer Tow
M5 — 25 Amp
Natural
Inverter
M6 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #1
(ACC), Rain Sensor
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M7 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #2
(BATT/ACC SE-
LECT)
M8 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seat
(If Equipped)
M9 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Heated Seat
(If Equipped)
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M10 — 15 Amp
Blue
Ignition Off Draw
— Vehicle Enter-
tainment System
(IOD-VES), Satellite
Digital Audio Re-
ceiver (SDARS),
DVD, Hands-Free
Module (HFM),
Universal Garage
Door Opener
(UGDO), Vanity
Lamp (VANITY
LP), Streaming
Video Module
M11 — 10 Amp
Red
(Ignition Off Draw)
IOD-HVAC/ATC
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M12 — 30 Amp
Green
Amplifier (AMP)/
Radio
M13 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off
Draw— Cabin
Compartment Node
(IOD-CCN), SIREN,
Clock Module
(CLK MOD), Multi-
Function Control
Switch (MULTI-
FCTN SW)/ITM
M14 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Spare Fuse
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M15 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear View Mirror
(RR VW MIR),
Cabin Compart-
ment Node (CCN),
Multi-Function
Control Switch
(MULTIFTCN SW),
Tire Pressure Moni-
tor (TPM), Glow
Plug Module (GLW
PLG MOD) — Ex-
port Diesel Only,
Assy-Shifter (Hall
Effect), Acoustic
Noise Cancellation
(ANC)
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M16 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint
Controller/
Occupant Classifi-
cation Module
(ORC/OCM)
M17 — 15 Amp
Blue
Left Tail/License/
Park Lamp (LT-
TAIL/LIC/PRK
LMP), Running
Lamps
M18 — 15 Amp
Blue
Right Tail/Park/
Run Lamp (RT-
TAIL/PRK/RUN
LMP)
M19 — 25 Amp
Natural
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #1 and #2)
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M20 — 15 Amp
Blue
Cabin Compart-
ment Node Interior
Light (CCN INT
LIGHT), Switch
Bank (SW BANK),
Steering Control
Module (SCM),
Switch Steering
Wheel
M21 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Auto Shut Down
(ASD #3)
M22 — 10 Amp
Red
Right Horn (RT
HORN (HI/LOW)
M23 — 10 Amp
Red
Left Horn (LT
HORN (HI/LOW)
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M24 — 25 Amp
Natural
Rear Wiper (REAR
WIPER)
M25 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump (FUEL
PUMP), Diesel Lift
Pump (DSL LIFT
PUMP) — Export
Only
M26 — 10 Amp
Red
Power Mirror
Switch (PWR MIRR
SW), Driver Win-
dow Switch (DRVR
WIND SW)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M27 — 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch
(IGN SW), Window
Module (WIN
MOD), PEM, Steer-
ing Column Lock
M28 — 10 Amp
Red
Next Generation
Controller (NGC),
PCM, Transmission
Feed (TRANS
FEED), TCM
M29 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Classifi-
cation Module
(OCM)
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M30 — 15 Amp
Blue
Rear Wiper Module
(RR WIPER MOD),
Power Folding Mir-
ror (PWR FOLD
MIR), J1962 Diag-
nostic Feed
M31 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Back-Up Lamps
(B/U LAMPS)
M32 — 10 Amp
Red
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC),
TT EUROPE
M33 — 10 Amp
Red
Next Generation
Controller (NGC),
Global Powertrain
Engine Controller
(GPEC), TCM
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M34 — 10 Amp
Red
Park Assist (PRK
ASST), Heater Ven-
tilation, Air Condi-
tioning Module
(HVAC MOD),
Headlamp Wash
(HDLP WASH),
Compass (COM-
PAS), IR Sensor,
Rear Camera, Lamp
Door FT Drv/Pass,
Lamp Flashlight,
AHLM, Relay Die-
sel Cabin Heater,
Rad Fan Diesel
M35 — 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirrors
FUSES/TIPM
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini-
Fuse
Description
M36 — 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet #3
(BATT)
M37 — 10 Amp
Red
Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Elec-
tronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP), Stop
Lamp Switch (STP
LP SW), Fuel Pump
Rly Hi Control
M38 — 25 Amp
Natural
Door Lock/Unlock
Motors (LOCK/
UNLOCK MTRS),
Liftgate Lock/
Unlock Motors
The heated mirrors, lower instrument panel power outlet
and removable floor console, when in the front position
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only service-
able by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused
by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver’s
seat. The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit
breaker located under the instrument panel near the
steering column. If you experience temporary or perma-
nent loss of these systems, see your authorized dealer for
service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your
battery. You may do the following:
•
Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Totally Inte-
grated Power Module (TIPM) labeled Ignition-Off
Draw (IOD).
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp .................578
Center & Rear Reading Lamps ............... 578
Front Door Courtesy Lamp.................. 578
Front Header Reading Lamps — If Equipped..... 578
Instrument Cluster Lamps ................. PC74
Liftgate Lamp(s) ......................... 578
Overhead Console Reading Lamps .......... PC579
Removable Console Lamp — If Equipped .......194
Visor Vanity Lamps.................... 6501966
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb Number
Backup, Tail, Stop Lamp ...................3157
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp . . . LED (See Note 1)
Fog Lamp — If Equipped ...............PSX24W
Park/Turn Signal ............. PY27 / 7W or 3757A
Front Side Marker ......................W5W
Headlamp — (Low and High Beam Halogen) .... H11
Headlamp (HID — If Equipped) Low Beam ..... D1S
License................................ 168
Note 1: The Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately. The
CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your
authorized dealer.
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) — If
Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop-
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-
charge (HID) headlamps, when the headlamps are
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This dimin-
ishes and becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Quad Headlamps
1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at
the rear of the headlamp housing.
2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and
remove the connector from the bulb.
3. Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the
headlamp housing.
4. Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked
into the headlamp housing.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb.
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlamp housing, then pull the bulb out.
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
Front Side Marker Lamp
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp
housing.
NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to
remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp
housing for bulb replacement.
2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp
housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp
housing.
Fog Lamp
NOTE: Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air
dam.
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and remove
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and
Backup Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to
disengage the two ball studs.
NOTE:
•
If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
•
The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
dislodging them separately.
Tail Lamp Housing Fastener Removal
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assem-
bly.
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light
bar and above the license plate.
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull
down on the lamp assembly for removal.
2. Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly
and pull the bulb out to remove.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place
ensuring the locking tab is secure.
Bulb Location
1 — Stop, Tail, Turn Signal Bulb Combo
2 — Backup Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 20 Gallons 76 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.3L and 3.8L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
4.0L Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
3.3L, 3.8L, and 4.0L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/
Antifreeze 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
13.4 Quarts 12.6 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater.
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil (3.3L and 3.8L Engines)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil (4.0L Engine)
Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (3.3L and 3.8L Engines) RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (4.0L Engine) ZFR5LP-13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection (3.3L and 3.8L Engines) 87 Octane
Fuel Selection (4.0L Engine) 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Recommended
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transaxle MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use
only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, CHAngE OIL will
flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is neces-
sary.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, Oil Change Required will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your dealer, the message can be reset by referring to
the steps described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use
Factory Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or
under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument
Cluster Descriptions section of this manual.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF. Checking the oil
level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve
the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only
when the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN
mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, the
brake master cylinder, the power steering and the
transaxle and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter if using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.†
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the ignition cables (3.3L and
3.8L engines).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.3L, 3.8L,
and 4.0L engines).
❏ Replace the timing belt (4.0L engine).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 503
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV Joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace accessory drive belt(s).
❏ Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
504 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 505
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 507
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-
turer, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle.............................. 511
▫ Prepare For The Appointment .......... 511
▫ Prepare A List ..................... 511
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ........... 511
䡵 If You Need Assistance ................ 511
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center ......... 512
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center .... 512
▫ In Mexico Contact .................. 512
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 513
▫ Service Contract .................... 513
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . 514
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts ...................... 514
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ............... 514
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 514
▫ In Canada ........................ 515
䡵 Publication Order Forms ............... 515
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
line at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 515
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-
hicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
ties and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
516 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 517
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
518 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 459
Adding Fuel ........................... 393
Adding Washer Fluid ..................... 456
Additives, Fuel ......................... 387
Adjustable Pedals ....................... 192
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 448
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............452
Air Conditioning ........................311
Air Conditioning Controls ................. 311
Air Conditioning Filter .................330,453
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............329
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone .............317,325
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............... 452
Air Conditioning System .............311,319,452
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control ........ 315
Air Pressure, Tires ....................... 367
Airbag .............................. 64,70
Airbag Deployment ....................... 71
Airbag Light ................... 65,69,73,95,253
Airbag Maintenance ....................... 72
Airbag, Side ..........................69,70
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 66,69,70
Alarm Light ...........................251
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................... 17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ................... 303
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 458,459,488
Disposal ............................460
Anti-Lock Warning Light .................. 251
Anti-Theft System ........................ 17
Appearance Care ........................468
Ashtray ...............................222
Assistance Towing .......................130
Auto Down Power Windows ................ 39
Auto Up Power Windows ................39,216
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................ 102
Automatic Door Locks ................... 33,34
Automatic Headlights ....................181
520 INDEX
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .........319
Automatic Transaxle ......................337
Adding Fluid ......................... 466
Fluid Level Check .....................466
Interlock System ....................... 338
Selection Of Lubricant ................465,490
Shifting .............................339
Special Additives ...................... 467
Automatic Transmission ................ 465,467
Adding Fluid ......................466,467
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 467
Fluid Change .........................467
Fluid Level Check .....................466
Fluid Type ........................ 465,490
Battery ............................... 451
Gas Caution .......................... 451
Jump Starting .........................430
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ....... 26
Saving Feature (Protection) ............... 184
Belts, Seat ..............................95
Blind Spot Monitoring .................... 106
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............455
B-Pillar Location ........................ 362
Brake Assist System ...................... 354
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 353
Brake Fluid ............................ 490
Brake, Parking ..........................349
Brake System ........................... 462
Fluid Check ..........................463
Warning Light ........................ 249
Brakes ............................... 462
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............... 337
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........93
Bulb Replacement ....................... 483
Bulbs, Light ..........................96,482
Calibration, Compass .................. 260,267
10
INDEX 521
Camera, Rear ........................... 201
Capacities, Fluid ........................488
Caps, Filler
Fuel ............................... 393
Oil (Engine) .......................... 447
Power Steering ........................348
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ............... 460
Car Washes ............................468
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 94,388
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier .......................235
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................227
Caution, Exhaust Gas ................... 51,388
Cellular Phone .......................115,311
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............487
Chains, Tire ............................ 373
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 418
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................359
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light) ............................. 252,442
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............94
Checks, Safety ........................... 94
Child Restraint ........................ 79,81
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............... 84
Child Safety Locks ........................46
Child Seat .............................. 88
Clean Air Gasoline ....................... 385
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 470
Climate Control ......................... 311
Clock ...........................273,277,286
Coat Hook ............................227
Coin Holder ...........................228
Cold Weather Operation ................... 335
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ............. 310
Compact Spare Tire ......................369
Compass ........................ 258,260,266
522 INDEX
Compass Calibration ..................260,267
Compass Variance .................... 259,267
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 265
Connector
UCI ................................296
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........296
Console ..............................228
Console, Floor .......................... 228
Console, Overhead ....................... 204
Console, Removable ......................232
Contract, Service ........................ 513
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........460
Cooling System ......................... 457
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 459
Coolant Capacity ......................488
Coolant Level ...................... 457,461
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 460
Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................458
Inspection ........................... 461
Points to Remember ....................461
Pressure Cap .........................460
Radiator Cap ......................... 460
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......458,488,489
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ..............193
Cupholders .........................220,473
Customer Assistance ..................... 511
Data Recorder, Event ......................74
Daytime Running Lights ................... 183
Dealer Service ..........................444
Defroster, Rear Window ................... 233
Defroster, Windshield .............96,313,314,323
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................ 441
Dimmer Control ........................180
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle .................... 466
Automatic Transmission ................. 466
Oil (Engine) .......................... 445
10
INDEX 523
Power Steering ........................348
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................433
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............460
Engine Oil ...........................448
Domelight .............................180
Door Locks .............................30
Door Locks, Automatic ....................33
Door Opener, Garage .....................207
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ...................344
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ..............................345
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System™) .... 307
E-85 Fuel .............................389
Electric Remote Mirrors ................... 104
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 216
Electronic Brake Control System .............353
Brake Assist System .................... 354
Electronic Stability Program ...............355
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 193
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............355
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) .............................201,261
Emergency, In Case of
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 416
Jacking ........................... 418,420
Jump Starting .........................430
Overheating ..........................416
Emission Control System Maintenance ......442,492
Engine ............................ 439,440
Air Cleaner ..........................448
Block Heater .........................336
Break-In Recommendations ................93
Checking Oil Level ..................... 445
Compartment ......................439,440
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................... 489
524 INDEX
Cooling .............................457
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 51,94,388
Flooded, Starting ......................335
Fuel Requirements ..................384,488
Oil ........................... 445,488,489
Oil Change Interval ....................446
Oil Disposal ..........................448
Oil Filler Cap .........................447
Oil Filter Disposal ..................... 448
Oil Selection .......................446,488
Oil Synthetic ......................... 447
Overheating ..........................416
Starting ............................. 334
Temperature Gauge .................... 253
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........70
Event Data Recorder ...................... 74
Exhaust Gas Caution .............. 51,94,388,449
Exhaust System .......................94,449
Express Down Windows ...................22
Extender, Seat Belt ........................63
Exterior Folding Mirrors ................... 104
Exterior Lights ..........................96
Fabric Care ............................471
Filler Location Fuel ......................257
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................448
Air Conditioning .................... 330,453
Engine Oil ........................ 448,489
Engine Oil Disposal ....................448
Flashers
Hazard Warning .......................416
Turn Signal ........................ 96,248
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 186
Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 427
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .......................392
Engine Oil ...........................391
10
INDEX 525
Fuel Requirements ..................389,390
Maintenance .........................392
Replacement Parts .....................392
Starting ............................. 392
Flooded Engine Starting ...................335
Floor Console ..........................228
Fluid Capacities .........................488
Fluid Leaks .............................96
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle .................... 466
Automatic Transmission ................. 466
Brake .............................. 463
Power Steering ........................348
Fluids ................................489
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 489
Fog Light Service ........................485
Fog Lights .......................183,252,485
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘n Go) Seating ........... 155
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................432
Fuel ................................. 384
Adding ............................. 393
Additives ............................ 387
Clean Air ............................ 385
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................257,393
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ................... 257
Gasoline ............................ 384
Gauge ..............................245
Light ............................... 245
Octane Rating ........................ 489
Requirements ......................384,488
Tank Capacity ........................488
Fuel, Flexible ............. See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution .....................387
Fueling ...............................393
Fuses ................................473
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........207
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............393,394
526 INDEX
Gasoline, Clean Air ......................385
Gasoline (Fuel) ......................... 384
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 386
Gauges
Coolant Temperature ................... 253
Fuel ............................... 245
Speedometer ......................... 248
Tachometer ..........................251
Gearshift ..............................339
General Information ...............16,27,144,384
Glass Cleaning .......................... 472
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................167
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 396,400
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............395,399
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) ..............115
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ........................ 345
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 416
Head Restraints .........................152
Headlights ............................181
Cleaning ............................472
Lights On Reminder ....................183
Passing ............................. 186
Time Delay .......................... 182
Washers ............................. 182
Heated Mirrors ......................... 105
Heated Seats ...........................152
Heater ............................... 311
Heater, Engine Block ..................... 336
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 185
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................ 403
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 207
Hood Release ..........................177
Hook, Coat ............................ 227
10
INDEX 527
Ignition ............................... 13
Key............................... 12,13
Ignition Key Removal .....................13
Illuminated Entry ........................ 19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...................14
Infant Restraint ........................79,81
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 261
Inside Rearview Mirror ................... 102
Instrument Cluster .......................245
Instrument Panel and Controls .............. 243
Instrument Panel Cover ................... 471
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 472
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 473
Interior Appearance Care ..................471
Interior Lights ....................... 179,180
Introduction .............................4
Jack Location ...........................418
Jack Operation .......................... 418
Jump Starting ..........................430
Key, Programming ........................16
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................14
Key-In Reminder .........................14
Keyless Entry System ......................19
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster ............................65
Lane Change Assist ...................... 185
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................55
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren) ......................84
Latches ................................96
Hood .............................. 177
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 384
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 96
Life of Tires ............................ 372
528 INDEX
Liftgate ................................48
Light Bulbs ............................. 96
Lights ..............................96,179
Airbag ......................65,69,73,95,253
Alarm ..............................251
Anti-Lock ........................... 251
Automatic Headlights ................... 181
Back-Up ............................ 486
Battery Saver ......................... 184
Brake Assist Warning ...................356
Brake Warning ........................249
Bulb Replacement ................... 482,483
Center Mounted Stop ................... 487
Daytime Running ...................... 183
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ............... 180
Engine Temperature Warning ..............248
Exterior .............................. 96
Fog ..........................183,252,485
Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 416
Headlight Switch ...................... 181
Headlights On Reminder .................183
High Beam Indicator .................... 252
High Beam/Low Beam Select .............185
Illuminated Entry .......................19
Interior .......................... 179,180
License ............................. 487
Lights On Reminder ....................183
Low Fuel ............................245
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 252
Oil Pressure .......................... 247
Park ............................ 181,484
Passing ............................. 186
Reading ............................. 205
Rear Servicing ........................ 486
Rear Tail ............................ 486
Seat Belt Reminder .....................252
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .............. 251
Service ...........................482,483
10
INDEX 529
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 252
Side Marker .......................485,486
SmartBeams .......................... 186
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .............. 251
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........246
Turn Signal ...................... 96,484,486
Voltage .............................245
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 245
Load Leveling System .................... 234
Loading Vehicle ................... 227,395,397
Capacities ...........................397
Tires ...............................362
Locks
Door ................................30
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) .............................. 84
Lubrication, Body .......................455
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ................. 235
Lumbar Support ........................155
Maintenance Free Battery ..................451
Maintenance Procedures ................... 444
Maintenance Schedule .................... 492
Maintenance, Sunroof ..................... 216
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 252,442
Manual, Service ......................... 515
Map/Reading Lights ..................... 205
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ............. 172
Memory Seat ........................ 105,172
Mini-Trip Computer ................... 258,265
Mirrors ............................... 102
Automatic Dimming .................... 102
Electric Remote ....................... 104
Exterior Folding .......................104
Heated ............................. 105
Memory ............................ 172
Outside .............................103
Rearview ............................ 102
Vanity ..............................106
530 INDEX
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ............... 376
Mopar Parts .........................443,514
Multi-Function Control Lever ............... 184
Navigation System (uconnect威 gps) ...........201
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 93
Occupant Restraints ...................53,69,71
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) .............66,69,70
Odometer .............................256
Oil Change Indicator ................ 256,257,264
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...........256,257,264
Oil, Engine ......................... 445,489
Capacity ............................488
Change Interval ....................... 446
Checking ............................445
Disposal ............................ 448
Filter ............................ 448,489
Filter Disposal ........................448
Identification Logo .....................446
Materials Added to ..................... 447
Recommendation ................... 446,488
Synthetic ............................447
Viscosity ......................... 447,488
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 441,442
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ........... 207
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ............... 102,103
Overhead Console ....................... 204
Overhead Travel Information Center .......... 204
Overheating, Engine ...................253,416
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,515
Panic Alarm ............................ 23
Park Sense System, Rear ...................196
Parking Brake .......................... 349
Parking On Hill .........................349
10
INDEX 531
Pedals, Adjustable .......................192
Personal Settings ........................268
Pets, Transporting ........................ 89
Phone, Cellular .........................115
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威) .............. 115
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 362
Power
Door Locks ...........................32
Lift Gate ............................. 49
Mirrors .............................104
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .......... 216
Seats ...............................151
Sliding Door .......................... 42
Steering ..........................347,348
Sunroof .............................213
Windows .............................36
Windows, Express Down ................. 22
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 490
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts .............. 63
Preparation for Jacking ....................420
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................ 61
Programmable Electronic Features ............268
Radial Ply Tires ......................... 369
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ....... 457,460
Radio Operation ........................ 311
Radio Remote Controls ....................309
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) ........ 302,307
Rear Air Conditioning ................. 317,325
Rear Camera ...........................201
Rear Cross Path ......................... 113
Rear Heater ............................317
Rear Park Sense System ................... 196
Rear Window Defroster ...................233
Rearview Mirrors ........................ 102
Reclining Front Seats .....................154
Recorder, Event Data ......................74
532 INDEX
Recreational Towing ................... 413,435
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 62
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........ 309
Remote Starting System .................... 27
Removable Floor Console ..................232
Replacement Keys ........................16
Replacement Parts .......................443
Replacement Tires ....................... 372
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 514
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ......... 256,257,264
Restraint, Head .........................152
Restraints, Child .......................79,88
Restraints, Infant ......................... 79
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ................ 432
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) ................. 235
Rotation, Tires ..........................375
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................95
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 96
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................514
Safety, Exhaust Gas ..................... 51,94
Safety Information, Tire ...................357
Safety Tips ............................. 94
Satellite Radio Antenna ...................303
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) ......... 302,307
Schedule, Maintenance ....................492
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 473
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 62
Seat Belts ............................53,95
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .................. 60
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........60
And Pregnant Women ................... 63
Child Restraint .......................79,81
Extender ............................. 63
Front Seat ............................ 55
Inspection ............................95
Pretensioners .......................... 61
10
INDEX 533
Rear Seat .............................55
Seats .................................149
Adjustment .......................... 150
Easy Entry ........................... 159
Fold in Floor (Stow ⬘nGo) ...............155
Heated ............................. 152
Lumbar Support ....................... 155
Memory ............................ 172
Power ..............................151
Reclining ............................ 154
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) ...............155
Tilting ..............................159
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 458,489
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...................14
Sentry Key Programming ................... 16
Sentry Key Replacement ................... 16
Service Assistance ....................... 511
Service Contract ......................... 513
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction
Indicator) ............................. 252
Service Manuals ........................ 515
Setting the Clock ..................273,277,286
Settings, Personal ........................268
Shoulder Belts ........................... 55
Signals, Turn ................. 96,184,248,484,486
Sirius Backseat TV™ (uconnect威 studios) .......307
Sliding Door ............................ 41
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............344
SmartBeams ...........................186
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................. 373
Snow Tires ............................ 375
Spare Tire .......................... 369,419
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..............193
Speedometer ...........................248
Starting ............................... 334
Automatic Transmission ................. 334
Cold Weather ......................... 335
534 INDEX
Engine Fails to Start ....................335
Remote .............................. 27
Starting and Operating .................... 334
Starting Procedures ...................... 334
Steering
Power ........................... 347,348
Tilt Column ..........................191
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .........................309
Storage ............................223,482
Storage Bin ............................ 223
Storage, Vehicle ...................... 328,482
Storing Your Vehicle ...................... 482
Stow ⬘n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats ............. 155
Sun Roof .............................. 213
Sunglasses Storage .......................205
Sunroof Maintenance ..................... 216
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........ 64
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................447
System, Remote Starting .................... 27
Tachometer ............................251
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 319
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ....... 253,417
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............84
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 191
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........362
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............361
Tire Markings .......................... 357
Tire Safety Information ....................357
Tires ............................ 96,366,516
Aging (Life of Tires) ....................372
Air Pressure ..........................366
Chains .............................. 373
Changing ............................418
Compact Spare ........................ 369
Flat Changing ........................427
General Information .................... 366
10
INDEX 535
High Speed ..........................368
Inflation Pressures .....................367
Jacking ........................... 418,420
Life of Tires .......................... 372
Load Capacity ........................ 362
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ........... 376
Pressure Warning Light ..................246
Quality Grading .......................516
Radial ..............................369
Replacement ......................... 372
Rotation ............................375
Safety ...........................357,366
Sizes ...............................359
Snow Tires ...........................375
Spare Tire ........................... 419
Spinning ............................ 370
Tread Wear Indicators ................... 371
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............405
Towing ............................... 399
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............130
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 433
Guide .............................. 404
Recreational ....................... 413,435
Weight .............................. 404
Towing Assistance ....................... 130
Traction Control ......................... 353
Traction Control Switch ...................353
Trailer Towing .......................... 399
Cooling System Tips ....................412
Hitches ............................. 403
Minimum Requirements ................. 406
Trailer and Tongue Weight ............... 405
Wiring .............................. 410
Trailer Towing Guide ..................... 404
Trailer Weight .......................... 404
Transaxle .............................337
Automatic ........................... 337
Operation ........................... 337
536 INDEX
Selection of Lubricant ................ 465,490
Transmission ........................... 465
Automatic ........................... 465
Fluid ............................465,490
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry) ................................. 26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 207
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........ 19
Transporting Pets ........................ 89
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 371
Trip Computer ..........................258
Trip Odometer ..........................256
Turn Signals ...................184,248,484,486
UCI Connector .........................296
uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) .............. 115
Umbrella Holder ........................ 225
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 516
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 296
Universal Transmitter .....................207
Unleaded Gasoline .......................384
Upholstery Care ........................471
Vanity Mirrors ..........................106
Variance, Compass .................... 259,267
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 395
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 6
Vehicle Loading ................... 362,395,397
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage ....................... 328,482
Video Entertainment System™ (Rear Seat Video
System) ...............................307
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 144
Warning Flasher, Hazard .................. 416
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 245
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................514
10
INDEX 537
Washer, Adding Fluid ..................... 456
Washing Vehicle ......................... 468
Water
Driving Through ......................345
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................470
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................470
Wheel Nut Torque .......................427
Wind Buffeting ....................... 41,216
Window Fogging ........................ 329
Windows .............................. 36
Power ...............................36
Rear Vent ............................ 36
Windows, Express Down ................... 22
Windshield Defroster ......................96
Windshield Washers ...................... 456
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 455
Wiper Blade Replacement .................. 455
Zone Control (Temperature Control) ..........315
538 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
TOWN & COUNTRY
2009 OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler LLC
81-026-0917
Fourth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
2009 TOWN & COUNTRY
